Language Arts - Marshall County Schools
October 30, 2017 | Author: Anonymous | Category: N/A
Short Description
The A+LS™ Language Arts courses include comprehensive, completely .. Students identify words that begin with the lett&nb...
Description
Curriculum Planning Manual Language Arts 3LIT5000
7506 N. Broadway Extension Oklahoma City, OK 73116 800.222.2811 www.amered.com
Table of Contents Language Arts Curriculum Planning Manual Teachers’ Guides and Scope and Sequences Please note: Courses are listed in grade level sequence. Building Vocabulary I - VIII ........................................................................................................................................ 7 Language Usage I - VIII............................................................................................................................................ 36 Learning Letter Sounds ............................................................................................................................................. 58 Storybook Phonics I and II ........................................................................................................................................ 65 Reading I - VIII ....................................................................................................................................................... 77 English Literature IX - XII ....................................................................................................................................... 107 English Skills IX - XII.............................................................................................................................................. 162 Writing I - XII........................................................................................................................................................ 178 Language Arts Keyboard Companion I - VI ................................................................................................................ 209
i
Language Arts Grade Levels K - 12
The A+LS™ Language Arts courses include comprehensive, completely integrated courses for grades K-12. The Language Arts titles are designed to reinforce skills in vocabulary, grammar, language, writing, literature, and reading comprehension in many forms and levels of learning. The Language Arts courses provide an extensive e-learning solution ideal for schools that want to use technology to improve their instructional process.
•
Language Arts is presented as a collection of year-long courses.
•
All lessons contain an integrated study guide and essay or constructed response.
•
Lessons include a variety of essay types such as descriptive, persuasive, expository, and letter writing.
•
Most Language Arts lessons are certified by MetaMetrics® with Lexile® scores.
•
A+® VIP Bundle customers receive access to Encyclopædia Britannica® Online School Edition (EB) workspaces which contain learning materials. Learning materials may contain articles, games, images, maps, and/or videos. Clearvue (CV) video clips may be included as well.
1
Language Arts Grade Levels K - 12
•
The content in these courses is designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the National Council of Teachers of English (NCTE) for the Standards of English Language Arts.
•
Students learn to identify and correctly use nouns, verbs, modifiers, and the other parts of speech. They also learn the importance of sentence construction and identifying sentence parts including simple and complex subjects and predicates, verbs, and phrases as well as capitalization and punctuation guidelines.
•
The Writing titles emphasize six aspects of writing including ideas, organization, voice, word choice, fluency, and conventions. Students will learn varieties of writing formats that include personal narratives, journals, newspaper writing, and descriptive writing.
•
The Literature lessons provide a broad exposure to literature, enabling the student to acquire the necessary skills to understand and appreciate literature by exploring universal themes through study guides and later in the questions on literary terms, devices, and forms.
•
Due to the interactive nature of the A+ VIP Bundle, there are a few specific software requirements: o
EB requires a web browser, the following are recommended: Microsoft Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 or higher Safari® versions 2.0 or higher Note: EB requires cookies enabled.
o
EB interactive activities require a web browser equipped with the Adobe® Flash® and Shockwave plug-ins. Available at: www.adobe.com (select Get ADOBE FLASH PLAYER and Get Shockwave Player).
2
Language Arts Grade Levels K - 12 o
•
EB video clips are offered in Windows Media® and MPEG-4 formats. You’ll need to have a media player installed that will support these formats: Quicktime® - available at: www.apple.com/quicktime/download Windows Media® Player - available at: www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/ download
Numerous links to the Internet are provided in the A+ VIP Bundle. An Internet connection is not required for completion of this course, but it is required to utilize the EB components of the A+ VIP Bundle.
The A+ VIP Bundle includes the Encyclopædia Britannica Online School Edition, which has teacher resources and student learning materials. The materials include a wide range of interactive lessons, research projects, animations, and worksheets that support the Writing courses. • •
Writing contains EB workspaces. Each workspace may contain an article, diagram, study guide, video, or interactive media.
3
Language Arts Grade Levels K - 12 The Writing courses each contain a variety of lessons and differ in length, grade level, and available features. Listed below are the courses found within the curriculum planning manual.
Course Name
Number of Lessons
Length of Course in Semesters
Grade Levels
Lexile Measure
Building Vocabulary I
57
1
640L
Building Vocabulary II
49
2
780L
Building Vocabulary III
49
3
630L
Building Vocabulary IV
43
4
790L
Building Vocabulary V
43
5
830L
Building Vocabulary VI
47
6
820L
Building Vocabulary VII
48
7
820L
Building Vocabulary VIII
48
8
830L
Language Usage I
33
1
470L
Language Usage II
44
2
510L
Language Usage III
40
3
600L
Language Usage IV
47
4
620L
Language Usage V
45
5
640L
Language Usage VI
44
6
750L
Language Usage VII
38
7
800L
Language Usage VIII
45
8
760L
4
Language Arts Grade Levels K - 12
Course Name
Number of Lessons
Length of Course in Semesters
Grade Levels
Lexile Measure
Learning Letter Sounds
69
K
Storybook Phonics I
15
K-2
Storybook Phonics II
15
1-2
Reading I
43
1
500L
Reading II
45
2
580L
Reading III
43
3
620L
Reading IV
43
4
700L
Reading V
45
5
790L
Reading VI
48
6
810L
Reading VII
40
7
840L
Reading VIII
42
8
870L
English Literature IX
42
2
9
1010L
English Literature X
56
2
10
980L
English Literature XI
52
2
11
960L
English Literature XII
33
2
12
1040L
English Skills IX
40
2
9
930L
English Skills X
38
2
10
960L
English Skills XI
36
2
11
990L
English Skills XII
34
2
12
1030L
5
Language Arts Grade Levels K - 12
Course Name
Number of Lessons
Length of Course in Semesters
Grade Levels
Writing I
30
1
Writing II
34
2
Writing III
34
3
Writing IV
38
4
Writing V
45
5
Writing VI
45
6
Writing VII
45
7
Writing VIII
45
8
Writing IX
41
2
9
Writing X
44
2
10
Writing XI
46
2
11
Writing XII
46
2
12
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I
89
3-5
Language Arts Keyboard Companion II
65
3-5
Language Arts Keyboard Companion III
39
6-8
Language Arts Keyboard Companion IV
40
6-8
Language Arts Keyboard Companion V
45
9-12
Language Arts Keyboard Companion VI
32
9-12
6
Lexile Measure
Building Vocabulary I - VIII Grades 1 - 8 A+LS Building Vocabulary I - VIII introduces students to a variety of topics including: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
three key skills (phonemic awareness, phonics, and vocabulary development extensive tutorial and instructional narration in grade levels 1-3 core vocabulary words multiple exposures to the use of words and word sounds utilizing words in context language development exercises phonics skills of syllabication recognition of blends, digraphs, and diphthongs developing sight vocabularies dictionary and thesaurus skills synonyms, and antonyms connotation and denotation Latin and Greek root words prefixes and suffixes special vocabularies including vocabulary common to standardized tests multiple meaning words foreign terms and phrases promotion of language fluency
7
Building Vocabulary Grade Levels I – VIII
A+LS™ Building Vocabulary is a scientific, research-based, comprehensive, and completely integrated curriculum for grade levels 1-8. Building Vocabulary I, II, and III have tutorial and instructional voice support. A sequence of eight titles provides an extensive e-learning solution ideal for schools that want to use technology to improve their instructional process.
•
All lessons contain a study guide, a practice and mastery test, and an essay or constructed response.
•
Many lessons include a variety of essay types such as descriptive, persuasive, expository, and letter writing.
•
The A+LS program consists of an Internetbased instructional management system with student assessment tools built in, and educators can test students on national, state, district, or local objectives because any set of standards can be added to the system.
8
Building Vocabulary Grade Levels I – VIII
•
The Basic Vocabulary courses provide instruction in basic phonemic principles (phonemic awareness), phonetic (phonics) and visual introduction to new words and word sounds, and multiple exposures to the use of words and word sounds.
•
The student is provided an opportunity to use words in context and in language development exercises (vocabulary development).
•
Emphasis is placed on phonics skills of syllabication, pronunciation, word definition, recognition of blends, digraphs, diphthongs, letters that have more than one sound, and sight vocabulary development at each grade level.
•
Dictionary and thesaurus skills are enhanced through vocabulary exercises that include word recognition skills, multiple meaning words, synonyms, antonyms, connotation and denotation, Latin and Greek root words, prefixes and suffixes, foreign terms and phrases, core vocabulary words, and special vocabularies common to standardized tests.
•
The A+LS program uses three key skills (phonemic awareness, phonics, and vocabulary development) identified by the National Reading Panel as it directs students from beginning reading levels to more advanced reading skills utilizing a Four-Step Approach in each title series.
9
Building Vocabulary Grade Levels I – VIII
•
An Internet connection is not required for completion of this course but may be useful for students who wish to pursue further learning opportunities in Building Vocabulary.
•
Students are required to complete the essay section for lesson mastery. This setting must be enabled on the “Settings for Assignment of A+LS Lesson” dialog box. The default setting does not require the completion of the essay for assignment mastery. The circled item in the figure at right shows the Essay option has been enabled.
10
Building Vocabulary Grade Levels I – VIII
The Building Vocabulary titles develop skills in practical situations by utilizing a Four-Step Approach: Study Guide, Practice Test, Mastery Test, and Essay modules are used to define the instructional environment. •
The Study Guide module provides text- and graphicsbased delivery of material that is reinforced by pictures and diagrams supported by a wealth of content. Study Guides teach the concepts and skills associated with each lesson. A number of the Study Guide pages have specific, interactive feedback that will assist the student in solving problems or understanding concepts.
•
The Practice Test module allows the student to practice skills learned in the Study Guide section. The student has instant access to the study material for reference.
•
In the Mastery Test module, the student takes a scored examination, electronically submits the test, and the results are recorded in the A+LS Management System.
•
The Essay module allows the student to compose individual, free-form answers to a wide variety of questions and problems.
11
Building Vocabulary I Grade 1
Lesson Title
1
Sound Recognition
2
Sound Sequence
3 4 5 6
7 8
Loud and Soft Sounds Nonsense Sounds Sequencing Three Sounds Similar Sounds Introduction to Sounds 1 Introduction to Sounds 2
9
The Short /a/ Sound
10
The Short /e/ Sound
11
The Short /i/ Sound
12
The Short /o/ Sound
13
The Short /u/ Sound
14
The Long /a/ Sound
15
The Long /e/ Sound
16
The Long /i/ Sound
Lesson Content Phonemic Awareness Students are asked to identify many sounds that would occur in public, at home and in school. The recognition of these sounds will help the students understand their everyday world. Students listen to a variety of sounds and identify the order of a two sound sequence
Essays & Media
Students identify various sounds according to the volume of the sound Students are asked to correctly identify the correct source of a sound Students listen to a variety of sounds and identify the order of a three sound sequence Students determine the difference between similar two sequence and three sequence sounds of everyday objects and animals Sounds Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants Students identify short /a/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /e/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /i/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /o/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /u/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify long /a/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in creating the long vowel sound Students identify long /e/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in creating the long vowel sound Students identify long /i/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in creating the long vowel sound
12
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary I Grade 1
Lesson Title 17
The Long /o/ Sound
18
The Long /u/ Sound
26
The Long /oo/ Sound The /er/ /ir/ /ur/ Sounds The /ar/ Sound The /or/ Sound Y as a Vowel The Diphthong /ou/ & /ow/ The Diphthong /oi/ & /oy/ Silent Vowels
27
Initial Consonants 1
28
Initial Consonants 2
29
Initial Consonants 3
30
Initial Consonants 4
31
Initial Consonants 5
32
Initial Consonants 6
33
Initial Consonants 7
34
Initial Consonants 8
35
Initial Consonants 9
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Lesson Content Students identify long /o/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in creating the long vowel sound Students identify long /u/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in creating the long vowel sound
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Students identify the long sound of /oo/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /er/, /ur/, and /ir/ sounds
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /ar/ sound in words Students identify words having the /or/ sound Students identify words using /y/ as a vowel sound
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Students work with spellings ow and ou representing the diphthong /ou/ Student work with the spellings oi and oy representing the diphthong /oi/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify silent vowels in words; second vowel is usually silent Students identify words that begin with the letters b, f; sound of the letters /b/, /f/ Students identify words that begin with the letters d, g; sound of the letters /d/, /g/ Students identify words that begin with the letters h, j; sound of the letters /h/, /j/ Students identify words that begin with the letters k, c; /k/ and /c/ sometimes make the same sounds Students identify words that begin with the letters l, m; sound of the letters /l/, /m/ Students identify words that begin with the letters n, p; sound of the letters /n/, /p/ Students identify words that begin with the letters q, r; sound of the letters /q/, /r/ Students identify words that begin with the letters s, c; sound of the letters /s/, /c/ Students identify words that begin with the letters t, v; sound of the letters /t/, /v/
Essay: Written Response
13
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary I Grade 1
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
Lesson Title Initial Consonants 10 Final Consonants 1 Final Consonants 2 Final Consonants 3 Final Consonants 4 Final Consonants 5 Final Consonants 6 Like and Unlike Letters Like and Unlike Words
45
Initial Blends 1
46
Initial Blends 2
47
Initial Blends 3
48 49
Beginning Digraphs 1 Beginning Digraphs 2
50
Final Digraphs 1
51
Final Digraphs 2
52 53 54 55 56 57
Basic Sight Words 1 Basic Sight Words 2 Syllables Word Families Root Words Compound Words
Lesson Content Students identify words that begin with the letters w, y, z; sound of the letters /w/, /y/, /z/ Students identify words that end with k, b; sounds of ending /k/, /b/ Students identify words that end with x, m, f; sounds of ending /x/, /m/, /f/ Students identify words that end with t, p; sounds of ending /t/, /p/ Students identify words that end with d, b; sounds of ending /d/, /b/ Students identify words that end with n, g; sounds of ending /n/, /g/ Students identify words that end with l, r; sounds of ending /l/, /r/ Students identify letters with similar features; (c, e, o), (b, p, q, d), (v, w, u), (j, i), (g, y, j, p), (m, n, w, v, r) Students identify words that look similar to other words; (on, no, so), (an, am, and), (if, it, is, in) Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (pl, pr, fl, fr, br, tr, scr, sk, sn) Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (gr, dr, cr, cl, gl, st, sc, sw, squ) Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (sl, sp, bl, cl, sm, spl, spr, thur, str) Definition of a digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using digraphs ch, gh and ph Students identify words with sh and th; two sounds of /th/ Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs: ch, ph, ck, and sh Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs: th, gh, and ng Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words The identification and use of closed, open, and accented syllables Building vocabulary through the use of word families and rhyming words Recognizing and using root words to build vocabulary Recognizing and forming compound words
14
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written Activity Written
Response Response Response Response Response
Building Vocabulary II Grade Level 2
1 2
Lesson Title Letters and Sounds 1 Letters and Sounds 2
3
The Short /a/ Sound
4
The Short /e/ Sound
5
The Short /i/ Sound
6
The Short /o/ Sound
7
The Short /u/ Sound
8
The Long /a/ Sound
9
The Long /e/ Sound
10
The Long /i/ Sound
11
The Long /o/ Sound
12
The Long /u/ Sound
13 14 15 16 17 18
The Short/Long /oo/ Sound The /Er/ /Ir/ /Ur/ Sounds The /ar/ Sound The /or/ Sound Y as a Vowel The Diphthong /ou/ & /ow/
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants Students identify short /a/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /e/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /i/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /o/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /u/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify long /a/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in creating the long vowel sound Students identify long /e/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in creating the long vowel sound Students identify long /i/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in creating the long vowel sound Students identify long /o/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in creating the long vowel sound Students identify long /u/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in creating the long vowel sound
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Students identify the long and short sounds of /oo/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /er/, /ur/, and /ir/ sounds
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /ar/ sound in words Students identify words having the /or/ sound Students identify words using /y/ as a vowel sound
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Students work with spellings ow and ou representing the diphthong /ou/
Essay: Written Response
15
Building Vocabulary II Grade Level 2
20
Lesson Title The Diphthong /oi/ & /oy/ Silent Vowels
21
Initial Consonants 1
22
Initial Consonants 2
23
Initial Consonants 3
24
Initial Consonants 4
25
Initial Consonants 5
26
Initial Consonants 6
27
Initial Consonants 7
28 29 30
Final Consonants 1 Final Consonants 2 Final Consonants 3
31
Final Consonants 4
19
32 33
Like and Unlike Letters Like and Unlike Words
34
Initial Blends 1
35
Initial Blends 2
36
Initial Blends 3
37
Beginning Digraphs 1
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Student work with the spellings oi and oy representing the diphthong /oi/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify silent vowels in words; second vowel is usually silent Students identify words that begin with the letters b, d, f; sound of the letters /b/, /d/, /f/ Students identify words that begin with the letters c, k, s; sound of the letters /c/, /k/, /s/ Students identify words that begin with the letters g, h, j; sound of the letters /g/, /h/, /j/ Students identify words that begin with the letters l, m, n; sound of the letters /l/, /m/, /n/ Students identify words that begin with the letters p, q, r; sound of the letters /p/, /q/, /r/ Students identify words that begin with the letters t, v, w; sound of the letters /t/, /v/, /w/ Students identify words that begin with the letters y, z; sound of the letters /y/, /z/ Students identify words that end with k, b, x; sounds of ending /k/, /b/, /x/ Students identify words that end with m, t, p; sounds of ending /m/, /t/, /p/ Students identify words that end with d, s, n; sounds of ending /d/, /s/, /n/ Students identify words that end with g, l; sounds of ending /g/, /l/ Students identify words that end with r, f; sounds of ending /r/, /f/ Students identify letters with similar features; (c, e, o), (b, p, q, d), (v, w, u), (j, i), (g, y, j, p), (m, n, w, v, r) Students identify words that look similar to other words; (on, no, so), (an, am, and), (if, it, is, in) Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (pl, pr, fl, fr, br, tr, sk, sn) Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (gr, dr, cr, cl, gl, st, sc, sw, squ) Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends: sl, sp, bl, cl, sm, spl, spr, thr, str Definition of a digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using digraphs ch, gh and ph
Essay: Written Response
16
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary II Grade Level 2
38
Lesson Title Beginning Digraphs 2
39
Final Digraphs 1
40
Final Digraphs 2
41 42 43
Basic Sight Words 1 Basic Sight Words 2 Syllables
44
Dictionary Skills
45 46 47 48 49
Prefixes/Suffixes Word Families Root Words Compound Words Special Vocabulary
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Students identify words with sh and unvoiced th Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs ch, ph, ck, and sh Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs th, gh, and ng Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words The identification and use of closed, open, and accented syllables How to use a dictionary to determine the syllabication, pronunciation, definition, and correct spelling of words Using prefixes and suffixes to determine word meaning Building vocabulary through the use of word families Recognizing and using root words to build vocabulary Recognizing and forming compound words Enrichment
17
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary III Grade Level 3
1 2
Lesson Title Introduction to Sounds 1 Introduction to Sounds 2
3
The Short /a/ Sound
4
The Short /e/ Sound
5
The Short /i/ Sound
6
The Short /o/ Sound
7
The Short /u/ Sound
8
The Long /a/ Sound
9
The Long /e/ Sound
10
The Long /i/ Sound
11
The Long /o/ Sound
12
The Long /u/ Sound
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
The Long /oo/ Sound The /oo/ Sound The /er/ /ir/ /ur/ Sounds The /ar/ Sound The /or/ Sound Y as a Vowel The Diphthong /ou/ & /ow/
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants Students identify short /a/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /e/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /i/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /o/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify short /u/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating short vowel sound Students identify long /a/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in long vowel sound Students identify long /e/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in long vowel sound Students identify long /i/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in long vowel sound Students identify long /o/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in long vowel sound Students identify long /u/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept in long vowel sound
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Students identify the long sound of /oo/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify the three sounds of /oo/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /er/, /ur/, and /ir/ sounds
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /ar/ sound in words Students identify words having the /or/ sound Students identify words using y as a vowel sound
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Students work with spellings ow and ou representing the diphthong /ou/
Essay: Written Response
18
Building Vocabulary III Grade Level 3
21
Lesson Title The Diphthong /oi/ & /oy/ Silent Vowels
22
Initial Consonants 1
23
Initial Consonants 2
24
Initial Consonants 3
25
Initial Consonant Review
26
Final Consonants 1
27
Final Consonants 2
28
Final Consonants 3
20
29 30
Like and Unlike Letters Like and Unlike Words
31
Initial Blends 1
32
Initial Blends 2
33
Initial Blends 3
34 35
Beginning Digraphs 1 Beginning Digraphs 2
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Student work with the spellings oi and oy representing the diphthong /oi/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify silent vowels in words; second vowel is usually silent Students identify words that begin with the letters b, d, f, g; sound of the letters /b/, /d/, /f/, /g/; Students identify words that begin with the letters c, k, s; sound of the letters /c/, /k/, /s/ Students identify words that begin with the letters h, j, l, n; sound of the letters /h/, /j/, /l/, /n/; Students identify words that begin with the letters n, p, q, r; sound of the letters /n/, /p/, /q/, /r/ Students identify words that begin with the letters t, v, w; sound of the letters /t/, /v/, /w/; Students identify words that begin with the letters y, z; sound of the letters /y/, /z/
Essay: Written Response
A review of initial consonants
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that end with k, b, x , m; sounds of ending /k/, /b/, /x/ /m/ Students identify words that end with t, p, d s; sounds of ending /t/, /p/, /d/ /s/ Students identify words that end with n, g, l; sounds of ending /n/, /g/, /l/; Students identify words that end with r, f; sounds of ending /r/, /f/ Students identify letters with similar features; (c, e, o), (b, p, q, d), (v, w, u,), (j, i), (g, y, j, p), (m, n, w, v, r) Students identify words that look similar to other words; (on, no, so), (an, am, and), (if, it, is, in) Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (pl, pr, fl, fr, br, tr, scr, sk, sn) Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (gr, dr, cr, cl, gl, st, sc, sw) Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (sl, sp, bl, sm, spl, spr, thr, str, th, squ) Definition of a digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using digraphs ch, gh, and ph
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words with sh, voiced and unvoiced th, and wh
Essay: Written Response
19
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary III Grade Level 3 Lesson Title 36
Final Digraphs 1
37
Final Digraphs 2
38 39 40
Basic Sight Words 1 Basic Sight Words 2 Basic Sight Words 3
41
Dictionary
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Prefixes Suffixes Base Words Compound Words Synonyms Antonyms Homonyms Contractions
Lesson Content Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs ch, ck, and sh Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs th, gh, and ng Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words How to use a dictionary to determine the syllabication, pronunciation, definition, and correct spelling of words Using prefixes to determine word meaning Using suffixes to determine word meaning Recognizing and using base words to build vocabulary Recognizing and forming compound words Improving vocabulary through synonyms Improving vocabulary through antonyms Recognizing homonyms Identify and form contractions
20
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary IV Grade Level 4
1
Lesson Title Dictionary 1
2
Dictionary 2
3
5 6
Thesaurus Multiple Meaning Words Sight Word Review Parts of Speech
7
Analogies
8 9
Synonyms Antonyms Homonyms/ Homographs Words in Context Prefixes 1 Prefixes 2 Suffixes 1 Suffixes 2 Latin and Greek Roots
4
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Word Recognition
18
What’s in a Word?
19
Core Word Vocabulary 1
20 21 22
Core Word Vocabulary 2 Core Word Vocabulary 3 Testing Strategies
Lesson Content How to use a dictionary; parts of the dictionary; dictionary entry How to use a dictionary to determine the syllabication, pronunciation key, definition, and correct spelling of words How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find similar word meanings
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Review of mastered basic sight words Review of the eight parts of speech Definition of analogy; strategies for solving types of relationships; students practice completing analogies Improving vocabulary through synonyms Improving vocabulary through antonyms
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Recognizing homonyms and homographs
Essay: Written Response
Using Using Using Using Using
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning prefixes to determine word meaning prefixes to determine word meaning suffixes to determine word meaning suffixes to determine word meaning
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context, prefixes, suffixes, and roots Words borrowed from names and places Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in social science, including geography, history, economics, anthropology, sociology, and civics Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words art, music, and language arts Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in math, science, and computers Test taking strategies; multiple choice; true/false; reading comprehension; vocabulary
21
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Written Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary IV Grade Level 4
Lesson Title 23
Short Vowel Sounds
24
Long Vowel Sounds
25
The /oo/ Sound
26
The /ur/ Sound
27 28 29 30
Diphthongs 1 Diphthongs 2 Words ending in Y The /or/ Sound
31
Initial Consonants 1
32
Initial Consonants 2
33
Initial Consonants 3
34
Final Consonants 1
35
Final Consonants 2
36
Consonant Blends 1
37
Consonant Blends 2
38
Consonant Blends 3
39 40
Final Consonant Blends 1 Final Consonant Blends 2
Lesson Content Students identify short /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating the short vowel sound Students identify long /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel and consonant-vowel-vowel-consonant concepts in creating the long vowel sound Students identify long and short sounds of /oo/ in examples Students identify words that have the /ur/ sound spelled er, ir, or and ur sounds Students work with spellings ow and ou Students work with spellings oi and oy Students identify words ending with the long "e" sound of "y" Students identify words having the /or/ sound Students identify words that begin with the letters b, d, f, h, j, k and l; sound of the letters /b/, /d/, /f/, /h/, /j/, /k/ and /l/ Students identify words that begin with the letters m, n, p, r, s, t and v; sound of the letters /m/, /n/, /p/, /r/, /s/, /t/ and /v/ Students identify words that begin with the letters c, g, q, w, y, and z; sound of the letters /c/, /g/, /q/, /w/, /y/ and /z/; the hard and soft sounds of "c" and "g" Students identify words that end with b, d, f, g, k. and l; sounds of ending /b/, /d/, /f/, /g/, /k/. and /l/ Students identify words that end with m, n, p, s, t, and x sounds of ending /m/, /n/, /p/, /s/, /t/ and /x/ Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: cl, cr, bl, br, dr, fl, fr, gl, gr Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: pl, pr, sp, spl, spr, st, str Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: sc, scr, sk, sl, sm, sn, sw, tr
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Students identify final consonant blends lb, ld, lf, lk, lp, lt, lm
Essay: Written Response
Students identify final consonant blends ct, ft, mp, nd, nt, pt, tch
Essay: Written Response
22
Building Vocabulary IV Grade Level 4
Lesson Title 41
Digraphs 1
42
Digraphs 2
43
Silent Consonants
Lesson Content Definition of digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using digraphs ch, sh, wh, and th Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs gh, ph, ck, ng, nk Identify the silent consonants kn, wr, gn, mb, and igh
23
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary V Grade Level 5
1 2 3 4 5
Lesson Title Dictionary Thesaurus Syllables/ Pronunciation Multiple Meaning Words Parts of Speech Review
6
Analogies
7 8
Synonyms Antonyms Homonyms/ Homographs Words in Context 1 Words in Context 2 Prefixes 1 Prefixes 2 Suffixes 1 Suffixes 2 Latin and Greek Roots
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Word Recognition
18
What’s in a Word?
19
Core Word Vocabulary 1
22
Core Word Vocabulary 2 Core Word Vocabulary 3 Testing Strategies
23
Short Vowel Sounds
20 21
Lesson Content How to use a dictionary, parts of the dictionary, and dictionary entry How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find similar word meanings The identification and use of closed, open, and accented syllables, using a pronunciation key
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Review of the eight parts of speech
Essay: Activity
Definition of analogy; strategies for solving types of relationships; students practice completing analogies Improving vocabulary through synonyms Improving vocabulary through antonyms
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Recognizing homonyms and homographs
Essay: Activity
Using Using Using Using Using Using
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning prefixes to determine word meaning prefixes to determine word meaning suffixes to determine word meaning suffixes to determine word meaning
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context, prefixes, suffixes, and roots Words borrowed from names and places Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in social science, including geography, history, economics, anthropology, sociology, and civics Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in math, art, music, and language arts Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in science and computers Test taking strategies Students identify short /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating the short vowel sound
24
Narrative Writing Written Response Activity Written Response Activity Activity
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary V Grade Level 5 Lesson Title 24
Long Vowels Sounds
25
The /oo/ Sound
26
The /ur/ Sound
27 28 29 30
Diphthongs 1 Diphthongs 2 Words ending in Y The /or/ Sound
31
Initial Consonants 1
32
Initial Consonants 2
33
Initial Consonants 3
34
Final Consonants 1
35
Final Consonants 2
36
Consonant Blends 1
37
Consonant Blends 2
38
Consonant Blends 3
39 40
Final Consonant Blends 1 Final Consonant Blends 2
41
Digraphs 1
42
Digraphs 2
Lesson Content Students identify long /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel and consonant-vowel-vowel-consonant concepts in creating the long vowel sound Students identify long and short sounds of /oo/ in examples Students identify words that have the /ur/ sound spelled er, ir, or, and ur sounds Students work with spellings ow and ou Students work with spellings oi and oy Students identify words ending with the long e sound of y Students identify words having the /or/ sound Students identify words that begin with the letters b, d, f, h, j, k, and l; sound of the letters /b/, /d/, /f/, /h/, /j/, /k/, and /l/ Students identify words that begin with the letters m, n, p, r, s, t,and v; sound of the letters /m/, /n/, /p/, /r/, /s/, /t/, and /v/ Students identify words that begin with the letters c, g, q, w, y, and z; sound of the letters /c/, /g/, /q/, /w/, /y/, and /z/; the hard and soft sounds of 'c' and 'g' Students identify words that end with b, d, f, g, k, and l; sounds of ending /b/, /d/, /f/, /g/, /k/, and /l/ Students identify words that end with m, n, p, s, t, and x sounds of ending /m/, /n/, /p/, /s/, /t/, and /x/ Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: cl, cr, bl, br, dr, fl, fr, gl, gr Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: pl, pr, sp, spl, spr, scr, st, str Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: sci, scr, sk, sl, sm, sn, sw, tr Students identify final consonant blends: lb, ld, lf, lk, lp, lt, lm
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Students identify final consonant blends: ct, ft, mp, nd, nt, pt, tch Definition of digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using digraphs ch, sh, wh, and th Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs gh, ph, ck, ng, nk
25
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary V Grade Level 5
43
Lesson Title Silent Consonants
Lesson Content Identify the silent consonants kn, wr, gn, mb, and igh
26
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VI Grade Level 6
1 2
Lesson Title Dictionary Thesaurus
3
Syllabication
4 5 6
Multiple Meaning Words 1 Multiple Meaning Words 2 Parts of Speech Review
7
Analogies
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Synonyms Antonyms Homographs Words in Context 1 Words in Context 2 Prefixes 1 Prefixes 2 Suffixes 1 Suffixes 2 Latin & Greek Roots 1 Latin & Greek Roots 2
17 18 19
Word Recognition
20 21 22
What’s in a Word? Foreign Terms Foreign Phrases
23
Core Word Vocabulary 1
24
Core Word Vocabulary 2
Lesson Content How to use a dictionary, parts of the dictionary, and dictionary entry How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find similar word meanings The identification and use of closed, open, and accented syllables, using a pronunciation key
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Review of the eight parts of speech
Essay: Written Response
Definition of analogy, strategies for solving types of relationships, students practice completing analogies Improving vocabulary through synonyms Improving vocabulary through antonyms Recognizing homographs Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning Using prefixes to determine word meaning Using prefixes to determine word meaning Using suffixes to determine word meaning Using suffixes to determine word meaning
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context, prefixes, suffixes, and roots Words borrowed from names and places Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies Foreign phrases that enrich and extend vocabularies Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in social science, including geography, history, economics, anthropology, sociology, and civics Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in art, music, and language arts
27
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VI Grade Level 6
25
Lesson Title Core Word Vocabulary 3
26
Testing Vocabulary
27
Short Vowel Sounds
28
Long Vowel Sounds
29
The /oo/ Sound
30
The /ur/ Sound
31 32 33 34
Diphthong 1 Diphthong 2 Words ending in Y The /or/ Sound
35
Initial Consonants 1
36
Initial Consonants 2
37
Initial Consonants 3
38
Final Consonants 1
39
Final Consonants 2
40
Consonants Blends 1
41
Consonants Blends 2
42
Consonants Blends 3
43
Final Consonant Blends 1
Lesson Content Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in math, science, and computers Test taking strategies, multiple choice; true/false; reading comprehension; vocabulary Students identify short /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating the short vowel sound Students identify long /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel and consonant-vowel-vowel-consonant concepts in creating the long vowel sound Students identify long and short sounds of /oo/ in examples Students identify words that have the /ur/ sound spelled er, ir, or and ur sounds Students work with spellings ow and ou Students work with spellings oi and oy Students identify words ending with the long e sound of y Students identify words having the /or/ sound Students identify words that begin with the letters b, d, f, h, j, k and l; sound of the letters /b/, /d/, /f/, /h/, /j/, /k/ and /l/ Students identify words that begin with the letters m, n, p, r, s, t and v; sound of the letters /m/, /n/, /p/, /r/, /s/, /t/ and /v/ Students identify words that begin with the letters c, g, q, w, y, and z; sound of the letters /c/, /g/, /q/, /w/, /y/ and /z/; the hard and soft sounds of c and g Students identify words that begin with the letters c, g, q, w, y, and z; sound of the letters /c/, /g/, /q/, /w/, /y/ and /z/; the hard and soft sounds of c and g Students identify words that end with m, n, p, s, t, and x sounds of ending /m/, /n/, /p/, /s/, /t/ and /x/ Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends; cl, cr, bl, br, dr, fl, fr, gl, gr Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends; pl, pr, sp, spl, spr, st, str Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends; sci, scr, sk, sl, sm, sn, sw, tr Students identify final consonant blends lb, ld, lf, lk, lp, lt, lm
28
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Response Written Response Written Response Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VI Grade Level 6
44
Lesson Title Final Consonant Blends 2
45
Digraphs 1
46
Digraphs 2
47
Silent Consonants
Lesson Content Students identify final consonant blends ct, ft, mp, nd, nt, pt, tch Definition of digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using digraphs ch, sh, wh, and th Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs gh, ph, ck, ng, nk Identify the silent consonants kn, wr, gn, mb, and igh
29
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VII Grade Level 7
1 2 3 4 5 6
Lesson Title Dictionary Thesaurus Syllables/ Pronunciation Multiple Meaning Words 1 Multiple Meaning Words 2 Parts of Speech Review
7
Analogies
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Synonyms Antonyms Homonyms Words in Context 1 Words in Context 2 Prefixes 1 Prefixes 2 Suffixes 1 Suffixes 2 Latin and Greek Roots 1 Latin and Greek Roots 2 Latin and Greek Roots 3 Latin and Greek Roots 4
17 18 19 20 21
Word Recognition
22 23 24 25
What’s in a Word? Foreign Terms 1 Foreign Terms 2 Foreign Phrases 1
Lesson Content How to use a dictionary; parts of the dictionary; dictionary entry How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find similar word meanings The identification and use of closed, open, and accented syllables; using a pronunciation key
Essays & Media Essay: Research Essay: Research Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Review of the eight parts of speech
Essay: Written Response
Definition of analogy; strategies for solving types of relationships; students practice completing analogies Improving vocabulary through synonyms Improving vocabulary through antonyms Recognizing homonyms Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning Using prefixes to determine word meaning Using prefixes to determine word meaning Using suffixes to determine word meaning Using suffixes to determine word meaning
Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response Written Response Written Response Written Response Written Response Written Response Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Research
Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context, prefixes, suffixes, and roots Words borrowed from names and places Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies Foreign phrases that enrich and extend vocabularies
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
30
Written Response Written Response Written Response Letter Writing
Building Vocabulary VII Grade Level 7
26 27 28 29
Lesson Title Foreign Phrases 2 Core Word Vocabulary 1 Core Word Vocabulary 2 Core Word Vocabulary 3
30
Test Strategies
31
Sounds for Y Vowel Diphthong Review Vowel Clusters Review 1 Vowel Clusters Review 2 Vowel Clusters Review 3 Vowel Clusters Review 4
32 33 34 35 36 37
R Controlled Vowels
38
Short Vowel Review
39
Two Sounds for C
40
Two Sounds for G
41
Two Sounds for S
42 43
Consonants Initial Blends Review Final Consonant Blends 1
44
Lesson Content Foreign phrases that enrich and extend vocabularies Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in social science, including geography, history, economics, anthropology, sociology, and civics Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in art, music, and language arts Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in math, science, and computers Test taking strategies, multiple choice; true/false; reading comprehension vocabulary Sounds for ending y; students identify /y/ sound in words
Essay: Written Response
Diphthongs; students complete words using correct Diphthongs
Essay: Activity
Use of vowel, consonant, vowel to create long /a/ or /e/ vowel sound; silent letters; students identify long /a/ or long /e/ words Use of vowel, consonant, vowel to create long /i/, long /o/, or long /u/ vowel sound; silent letters; students identify long /i/, or long /o/ or long /u/ words Review of sounds made by /oo/; students identify /oo/ sounds in words Review of sounds made by /ow/, /au/, and /aw/; students identify /ow/, /au/, and /aw sounds in words Review of /er/ and /or/ sounds: students complete words using correct /ar/, /er/, /ir/, /ur/, and /or/ spelling Students identify short vowel words Hard c and soft c explained; examples of words containing both sounds; students identify hard and soft c in words Hard g and soft g explained; examples of words containing both sounds; students identify hard and soft g in words Examples of ending s having the /z/ sound; students identify words with different sounds of s Students place consonants at the beginning or end of words Definition and review of consonant blends using l, r, tw, and the s combination Review of ending blends ld, lt., nd, nt, and nk; students complete words using the correct consonant blend
31
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VII Grade Level 7
45 46
Lesson Title Final Consonant Blends 2 Initial 3-Letter Blends
47
Silent Letters
48
The Sound of /ph/
Lesson Content Review of ending blends ct, st, sk, rm, and rn Examples of words having scr, spr, spl, squ, sch, and thr; students complete words with the correct blends Introduction of words that use silent letters (kn, wr, and gn); Students complete words with the correct sounds Review of the /f/ sound made by ph; students complete words using the correct spelling
32
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Building Vocabulary VIII Grade Level 8
1 2 3 4 5 6
Lesson Title Dictionary Skills Thesaurus Etymology Multiple Meaning Words 1 Multiple Meaning Words 2 Parts of Speech Review
7
Analogies
8 9
Synonyms Antonyms Homonyms/ Homographs Words in Context 1 Words in Context 2 Prefixes 1 Prefixes 2 Suffixes 1 Suffixes 2 Latin and Greek Roots 1 Latin and Greek Roots 2 Latin and Greek Roots 3 Latin and Greek Roots 4
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Word Recognition
22 23 24
What’s in a Word? Foreign Terms 1 Foreign Terms 2
Lesson Content How to use a dictionary, parts of the dictionary, and dictionary entry How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find similar word meanings The history or origin of words, the origin of words as listed in a dictionary entry
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Research Essay: Research
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Review of the eight parts of speech
Essay: Written Response
Definition of analogy, strategies for solving types of relationships, students practice completing analogies Improving vocabulary through synonyms Improving vocabulary through antonyms
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Recognizing homonyms and homographs
Essay: Written Response
Using Using Using Using Using Using
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning prefixes to determine word meaning prefixes to determine word meaning suffixes to determine word meaning suffixes to determine word meaning
Written Response Written Response Activity Written Response Activity Narrative Writing
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Letter Writing
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Narrative Writing
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context, prefixes, suffixes, and roots Words borrowed from names and places Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies
33
Essay: Written Response Essay: Research Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VIII Grade Level 8
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Lesson Title Foreign Phrases 1 Foreign Phrases 2 Core Word Vocabulary 1 Core Word Vocabulary 2 Core Word Vocabulary 3 Testing Vocabulary Vowel Diphthong Review Vowel Clusters Review 1 Vowel Clusters Review 2 Vowel Clusters Review 3
35
R Controlled Vowels
36
Short Vowel Review
37
Two Sounds for C
38
Two Sounds for G
39
Two Sounds for S
40 41 42 43
Initial/Final Consonants Initial Blends Final Consonant Blends 1 Final Consonant Blends 2
Lesson Content Foreign phrases that enrich and extend vocabularies Foreign phrases that enrich and extend vocabularies Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in social science, including geography, history, economics, anthropology, sociology, and civics Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in art, music, and language arts Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary words in math, science, and computers Test taking strategies Diphthongs, digraphs; students complete words using correct vowel combinations Use of vowel, consonant, vowel to create long /a/, /e/, /i/, and /u/ vowel sound; silent letters; students identify long /a/, /e/, /i/, and /u/ words Review of sounds made by /oo/; students identify /oo/ sounds in words Review of sounds made by /au/ and /aw/; students identify /au/ and /aw sounds in words Review of /er/ and /or/ sounds: students complete words using correct /ar/, /er/, /ir/, /ur/, and /or/ spelling Students identify short vowel words Hard c and soft c explained; examples of words containing both sounds; students identify hard and soft c in words Hard g and soft g explained; examples of words containing both sounds; students identify hard and soft g in words Examples of ending s having the /z/ sound; students identify words with different sounds of s
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Research Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing
Students place consonants at the beginning or end of words
Essay: Activity
Definition and review of consonant blends using l, r, tw, and the s combination Review of ending blends ld, lt, nd, nt and nk; students complete words using the correct consonant blend
Essay: Narrative Writing
Review of ending blends ct, st, sk, rm, and rn
Essay: Narrative Writing
34
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VIII Grade Level 8
44 45
Lesson Title Initial/Final Digraphs Initial 3-Letter Blends
46
Silent Letters 1
47
Silent Letters 2
48
The sound of Ph
Lesson Content Review of digraphs; students complete words using sh, ch, wh, and th Examples of words having scr, spr, spl, squ, sch, and thr; students complete words with the correct blends Introduction of words that use silent letters kn, wr, and gn; Students complete words with the correct sounds Introduction of words that use silent letters gh, lk, rh, sc, and tl; Students complete words with the correct sounds Review of the /f/ sound made by ph; students complete words using the correct spelling
35
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Language Usage I - VIII Grade Levels 1– 8 A+LS Language Usage I - VIII introduces students to a variety of topics including: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
extensive tutorial and instructional narration in grade levels 1-3 identification and correct use of nouns, verbs, modifiers, and the other parts of speech sentence construction identifying sentence parts including simple and complex subjects and predicates, verbs, and phrases sentence diagramming identification of grammar pitfalls including subject/verb disagreement, tense shifts, double negatives, fragments and run-on sentences parallelism misused words sentence mechanics capitalization guidelines writing dialogue punctuation for periods, commas, colons, and other marks punctuation for outlines business and friendly letters poetry direct and indirect quotations
36
Language Usage Grade Levels I - VIII
The A+LS™ Language Usage courses are comprehensive, integrated grammar courses for grade levels 1-8. This program directs students beginning with early grades in the proper use of the spoken and written English language. Language Usage I, II, and III have tutorial and instructional voice support. A sequence of eight titles provides an extensive e-learning solution ideal for schools that want to use technology to improve their instructional process. Each Language Usage title offers tutoring in the use the English language through lessons that focus on each part of speech.
•
Language Usage is presented as a collection of year-long courses.
•
All lessons contain a study guide, a practice and mastery test, and an essay or constructed response.
•
Lessons include a variety of essay types such as descriptive, persuasive, expository, and letter writing.
•
These courses are certified by MetaMetrics® with a Lexile® score.
•
The A+LS program consists of an Internet-based instructional management system with student assessment tools built in, and educators can test students on national, state, district, or local objectives because any set of standards can be added to the system.
37
Language Usage Grade Levels I - VIII
•
The content in these courses is designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the National Council of Teachers of English (NCTE) for the Standards of English Language Arts.
•
Students learn to identify and correctly use nouns, verbs, modifiers, and the other parts of speech.
•
Students learn the importance of sentence construction and identifying sentence parts including simple and complex subjects and predicates, verbs, and phrases.
•
Sentence mechanics are addressed in each title.
•
Students learn simple capitalization rules and guidelines for capitalization, underlining, and writing dialogue.
•
Punctuation lessons offer guidelines for using periods, commas, colons, and other marks, and punctuation for outlines, business and friendly letters, poetry, and direct and indirect quotations.
•
An Internet connection is not required for completion of this course but may be useful for students who wish to pursue further learning opportunities in Language Usage.
38
Language Usage Grade Levels I - VIII
The Language Usage courses develop skills in practical situations by utilizing a Four-Step Approach: Study Guide, Practice Test, Mastery Test, and Essay modules are used to define the instructional environment. •
The Study Guide module provides a text- and graphics-based delivery of material that is reinforced by pictures and diagrams supported by a wealth of content. Study Guides teach the concepts and skills associated with each lesson. A number of the Study Guide pages have specific, interactive feedback that will assist the student in solving problems or understanding concepts.
•
The Practice Test module allows the student to practice skills learned in the Study Guide section. The student has instant access to the study material for reference.
•
In the Mastery Test module, the student takes a scored examination, electronically submits the test, and the results are recorded in the A+LS Management System.
•
The Essay module allows the student to compose individual, free-form answers to a wide variety of questions and problems.
39
Language Usage I Grade Level 1
1 2
Lesson Title Nouns 1 Nouns 2
3
Nouns 3
4
Nouns 4
5
Verbs 1
6
Verbs 2
7
Verbs 3
8
Verbs 4
9
Verbs 5
10
Conjunctions
11
Adjectives 1
12
Adjectives 2
13
Grammar 1
14
Grammar 2
15 16
Grammar Improvements 1 Grammar Improvements 2
17
Word Application
18
Capitalization 1
Lesson Content Definition and use of nouns; students locate nouns in sentences Students learn how to identify singular nouns in sentences Review of singular nouns; introduction of plural nouns; adding -s and -es to form plurals in nouns Definition and examples of common and proper nouns; students find proper nouns in sentences Introduction of verbs; definition of verbs; the job of the verb to tell what the subject does; students find verbs in sentences Definition of contractions; the formation of contractions; the use of not in contractions Review of verbs; introduction of tenses; examples of present and past tense verbs Singular and plural verbs; the importance of subject and verb agreement Review of verbs; how to find a verb in a sentence; identifying present and past tense verbs Definition and examples of conjunctions; how conjunctions join sentence parts and words Introduction to adjectives as words that describe; students practice finding adjectives in sentences Review of adjectives; introduction to comparison in adjectives; adding -er and -est to form comparative forms of adjectives Review of nouns and verbs; students identify nouns and verbs in sentences with the use of picture prompts Review of singular and plural nouns; singular and plural verbs; subject/verb agreement Identifying double negatives; review of contractions and the use of not in contractions; identifying double negatives in sentences Review of sentence definition; students find the complete subject in sentences Recognize that words represent ideas, experiences, objects, events, and actions; naming and describing action words; how we use words to communicate Identify upper and lower case letters; using capital letters with the first word in a sentence; capitalizing the pronoun I
40
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Language Usage I Grade Level 1
Lesson Title 19
Capitalization 2
20
Punctuation
21
Sentences 1
22
Sentences 2
23
Sentences 3
24
Sentences 4
25
Sentences 5
26
Sentences 6
27
Sentences 7
28
Sentences 8
29
Abbreviations
30
Alphabetical Order
32
Noun and Verb Review Punctuation Review
33
Contractions Review
31
Lesson Content Capitalize proper nouns; names of people, places, months, and days of the week Punctuation at the end of declarative, imperative, interrogative and exclamatory sentences (.? !) Introduction of sentence definition; how we use sentences to communicate; write stories; review of complete sentences Review of nouns and verbs; the use of nouns and verbs in a sentence; the importance of word order in sentences Review of complete sentences; use of capital letters and punctuation marks; the importance of complete thoughts in sentences Finding complete sentences; students identify and correct incomplete sentences Introduction to sentences that tell; the correct use of punctuation end marks in telling sentences Introduction to sentences that command; the correct use of punctuation end marks in command sentences Introduction to sentences that show feeling; the correct use of punctuation end marks in sentences that show feeling Introduction to sentences that ask; the correct use of punctuation end marks in asking sentences Definition and examples of abbreviations; the use of abbreviations; abbreviating months, titles, days of the week; using capital letters with abbreviations How to alphabetize words; using the dictionary to determine alphabetical order; examples of alphabetical order; students place words in alphabetical order Review of nouns and verbs including common and proper nouns; finding the verbs in a sentence Review of when to use capital letters and punctuation marks Review of rules for forming contractions; the use of the apostrophe in contractions
41
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Language Usage II Grade Level 2
Lesson Title 1
Nouns 1
2
Nouns 2
3
Nouns 3
4
Nouns 4
5
Nouns 5
6
Verbs 1
7
Verbs 2
8
Verbs 3
9
Verbs 4
10
Verbs 5
11
Verbs 6
12
Verbs 7
13
Verbs 8
14
Verbs 9
15
Verbs 10
16
Verbs 11
17
Special Verbs 1
Lesson Content Definition of nouns as people, places, animals, and things; finding nouns in sentences; counting nouns in sentences Definition of singular and plural nouns; students identify and use singular and plural nouns in sentences Definition of common and proper nouns; differences between common nouns and proper nouns; students identify common and proper nouns Students learn to identify and use nouns as sentence subjects; nouns in sentences Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound words in sentences Definition and use of verbs; students recognize verbs in sentences Definition and examples of verbs in present and past tense; understanding the difference between action that is happening and action that has already happened Identification of contractions; using contractions in sentences; finding the words that can form contractions Definition of singular and plural; subject/verb agreement in sentences; singular and plural verb forms Introduction to regular and irregular verbs; examples of how regular and irregular verbs form their past tenses; adding -ed to form tense; words that have a different word for past tense Identification and examples of helping verbs; using helping verbs with present and past tense verbs Identification and examples of linking verbs; how linking verbs link nouns to describing words Identifying main verbs and helping verbs in sentences; the job of the main verb and the helping verb in a sentence Definition of verb tense; students learn to add -ed and -ing to words; changing the spelling of a word before adding -ed and –ing Students identify and use verbs that show action Students learn how to add endings to words that end in y; changing the spelling of words ending in y Introduction to the irregular verb be; forms of be including is, are, was, were
42
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Illustration Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Language Usage II Grade Level 2
Lesson Title 18
Special Verbs 2
19
Special Verbs 3
20
Conjunctions
21
Pronouns 1
22
Pronouns 2
23
Pronouns 3
24
Pronouns 4
25
Pronouns 5
26
Pronouns 6
27
Grammar 1
28
Grammar 2
29
Grammar 3
30
Word Application
31
Adjectives
32
Adverbs Grammar Improvements 1
33
Lesson Content Students use forms of do, including did, does, and done, correctly in sentences; students learn which forms of do are used with singular and plural words Students identify and use forms of have including: has, had, and have; students learn how to use forms of have with singular and plural nouns and in past and present tense Identification and examples of conjunctions; students correctly use conjunctions in sentences Pronoun definition and examples; correctly identify and use pronouns in a sentence; pronouns for first, second, and third person Definition and examples of nominative or naming case pronouns; using pronouns as the subject of sentences Definition of object pronouns; students determine if pronoun is naming or object; students correctly use object pronouns in sentences Definition of possession; examples of pronouns that show possession; possessive case pronouns Identification and use of personal singular and plural pronouns The importance of naming self last in writing, speaking, and in a series of words; identifying self in first and third person Singular and plural nouns; nouns that change from singular to plural by adding -s; nouns that use a different word to indicate plurality; nouns that have the same form in both singular and plural Rules for spelling when forming plurals; importance of subject/verb agreement Rules for forming possessive nouns; adding –‘s to show possession; rules for showing possession with words that end with -ed, -s, and the /z/ sound Recognize that words represent ideas, experiences, objects, events, and actions; naming and describing action words; identify incomplete and complete sentences Definition of an adjective; describing words; students recognize and use adjectives in a sentence Definition of an adverb; recognize and use adverbs in a sentence Definition and examples of articles; correctly using a and an; using articles as specific or general indicators
43
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response
Language Usage II Grade Level 2
36
Lesson Title Grammar Improvements 2 Grammar Improvements 3 Capitalization 1
37
Capitalization 2
38 39
Capitalization 3 Punctuation 1
40
Punctuation 2
41 42 43 44
Punctuation 3 Punctuation 4 Sentences 1 Sentences 2
34 35
Lesson Content Definition of a negative; examples of negative words; identifying double negatives
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response
Definition of a predicate; students identify subjects and predicates
Essay: Written Response
Capitalizing first words in sentences Recognizing proper nouns, capitalizing titles and initials, greetings and closings of letters, and abbreviations Family titles and greeting; closing of a letter Punctuation at the end of declarative, imperative and asking sentences Directions for addressing envelopes for friendly letters; the mailing address and the return address Using a comma after introductory words Using a colon to write the time of day Word order and definition of a sentence; introduction to sequence Simple and compound sentences; complete and fragment sentences
Essay: Written Response
44
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response
Language Usage III Grade Level 3
1 2 3 4
Lesson Title Nouns 1 Nouns 2 Nouns 3 Nouns 4
5
Verbs 1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Verbs 2 Verbs 3 Verbs 4 Verbs 5 Verbs 6 Verbs 7 Verbs 8 Verbs 9 Verbs 10
15
Verbs 11
16 17
Verbs 12 Conjunctions
18
Pronouns 1
19 20 21 22 23
Pronouns 2 Pronouns 3 Pronouns 4 Pronouns 5 Capitalization 1
24
Capitalization 2
25 26
Punctuation 1 Punctuation 2
27
Punctuation 3
Lesson Content Definition and use of nouns; students locate nouns in sentences Singular nouns Plural nouns Common and proper nouns Definition and use of verbs; identify verbs and verb usage in sentences; regular verbs; action verbs; colorful and tricky verbs The tenses; present tense verbs Past tense verbs Verb phrases; helping and auxiliary verbs; auxiliary verbs Main verbs and helping verbs; verb phrases Linking verbs; forms of be Irregular verbs; forms of do; forms of have Transitive verbs; direct objects Intransitive verbs; predicate adjectives Review of transitive and intransitive verbs Contractions; how contractions are formed; the apostrophe that replaces letters omitted Negatives and double negatives; adverbs and adjectives Correctly use conjunctions in sentences Definitions of pronouns; correctly identify a pronoun in a sentence; pronoun case forms; pronoun usage; correctly substitute nouns for pronouns; singular and plural pronouns Nominative case pronouns; subjective pronouns Objective case pronouns Possessive case pronouns; personal pronouns The tradition of naming self last Capitalizing common and proper nouns: first word in sentence Capitalizing titles of books, newspapers, reports, songs, letters, and television shows At the end of declarative sentences; at the end of imperative sentences Using question marks and exclamation marks Introductory words, phrases, or clauses; the use of punctuation with appositives; the use of a comma after introductory words
45
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written Written Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Language Usage III Grade Level 3
28
Lesson Title Punctuation 4
29
Punctuation 5
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Sentences Adjectives Adjectives Adjectives Adverbs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
Lesson Content Punctuation of items in a series The use of an apostrophe to show possession; identify need to punctuate with apostrophes and in contractions Sentence definition; complete sentences; sentence fragments Word order of sentences Definition and examples of run-on sentences Simple and compound sentences; the use of a comma in a compound sentence Declarative sentences; interrogative sentences Imperative sentences; exclamatory sentences Subjects and predicates Adjectives; tricky words such as: may/can, should/would, and good/well How adjectives make sentences more colorful; students identify adjectives Adjectives as articles Definition and examples of adverbs
46
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written Written Written Written Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response Response
Language Usage IV Grade Level 4
1 2 3
Lesson Title Nouns 1 Nouns 2 Nouns 3
4
Pronouns 1
5
Pronouns 2
6
Pronouns 3
7 8
Pronouns 4 Verbs 1
9
Verbs 2
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Verbs 3 Verbs 4 Verbs 5 Verbs 6 Verbs 7 Contractions Conjunctions
17
Adjectives 1
18
20 21 22 23
Articles Prepositional Phrases Adjectives 2 Adverbs 1 Adverbs 2 Adverbs 3
24
Prepositions
25 26 27
Interjections Sentences 1 Sentences 2
19
Lesson Content Definition and use of nouns Identification of singular and plural nouns; spelling changes in forming plurals Identification of common and proper nouns Definitions of pronouns; correctly identify a pronoun in a sentence; subject and object pronouns Nominative case pronouns Pronouns in compound subjects and objects; personal pronouns; subject pronouns Possessive nouns and pronouns Definition and use of action verbs; identify verbs and verb usage in sentences Verbs, present tense verbs, and past tense verbs; past participles; regular and irregular verbs Linking verbs Main and helping verbs Transitive and intransitive verbs Tricky verbs Forms of be, do, and have Definition, formation, and use of contractions Definition and use of conjunctions Adjective definition; proper adjectives; predicate adjectives; demonstrative adjectives Identification and correct use of articles; general and specific articles
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Response Written Response Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response Letter Writing Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Prepositional phrases used as adjectives
Essay: Written Response
Positive, comparative, and superlative degrees of comparison in adjectives Adverb definition and use Using prepositional phrases as adverbs Comparative and superlative forms of adverbs Identify and correctly use prepositions; object of the preposition; prepositional phrases Identify and correctly use words that express strong feelings Sentence definition; identifying subjects and predicates Complete sentences; run-on sentences; sentence fragments
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
47
Written Response Written Response Written Response Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Language Usage IV Grade Level 4
Lesson Title 28
Sentences 3
29 30
32
Sentences 4 Sentences 5 Subject/Verb Agreement Parts of Speech
33
Problem Words
34 35 36
Capitalization 1 Capitalization 2 Capitalization 3
37
Capitalization 4
38 39 40
Punctuation 1 Punctuation 2 Punctuation 3
41
Punctuation 4
42 43
Punctuation 5 Punctuation 6
44
Punctuation 7
45
Parallelism
46
Modifiers
47
Grammar Improvements
31
Lesson Content Simple and compound sentences; using a semi-colon in punctuating compound sentences Declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences Diagramming sentences
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing
Importance of subject/verb agreement
Essay: Written Response
Recognize and use the eight parts of speech in sentences Recognize and correctly use words such as: accept, except; affect, effect; are, our; its, it’s; your, you’re; bad, badly; good, well; real, really; beside, besides; from, off; in, into Punctuation and capitalization of abbreviations at the beginning of sentences Punctuation and capitalization of family titles, initials, and personal pronouns Capitalization in outlines Punctuation and capitalization of titles; underlining; capitalization in quotations; capitalization in book, magazine, and television show titles Using punctuation in direct quotes and dialogue Punctuation at the end of imperative and declarative sentences Punctuation in interrogative and exclamatory sentences Punctuation and capitalization of dates, cities, states, greetings, and closing of letters Use of colons in business letters; in writing time; how to write a list The use of punctuation with appositives The use of commas in bibliographies, in lists, and with introductory words; the use of the semi-colon with commas Making a series of items; words and phrases follow a pattern; using the same verb form to create parallelism Identify the correct placement of modifiers in sentences; identifying and avoiding misplaced modifiers
Essay: Activity
Avoiding unnecessary shifts in tense
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing
48
Language Usage V Grade Level 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Lesson Title Nouns 1 Nouns 2 Nouns 3 Nouns 4 Nouns 5 Verbs 1 Verbs 2 Verbs 3 Verbs 4 Verbs 5 Verbs 6
12
Pronouns 1
13 14
Pronouns 2 Pronouns 3
15
Punctuation 1
16 17 18 19
Punctuation Punctuation Punctuation Punctuation
20
Punctuation 6
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Punctuation 7 Adjectives 1 Adjectives 2 Adverbs 1 Adverbs 2 Prepositions 1 Prepositions 2 Interjections Direct Objects
2 3 4 5
Lesson Content Definition and use of nouns Singular and plural nouns Common and proper nouns; rules of capitalization of nouns Possessive nouns; rules of punctuation of nouns Review of plural and possessive forms of nouns Definition and use of verbs; present, past and future tense of verbs Irregular verb forms of be, do and have Contractions; punctuation of contractions Main and helping verbs; usage of may and can, and would and could Action and linking verbs; helping verbs Transitive verbs; intransitive verbs Definitions of pronouns; correctly identify a pronoun in a sentence; subject and object pronouns; antecedents Subjective (nominative); objective and possessive case pronouns Correctly substitute nouns for pronouns Using end marks; capitalization and punctuation of declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences Punctuating abbreviations, initials, titles, and capitalization Punctuating dates, greetings and closing of letters, and addresses The use of punctuation with appositives Punctuation of bibliographic references and outlines; capitalization rules Use a colon to write the time of day and after the salutation in a business letter; the use of a colon before a list; commas in series and with introductory words Punctuation of quotes and dialog; capitalization rules Adjective definition; proper adjectives Using comparative and superlative forms; adjective intensifiers Adverb definition and use; negative adverbs; adverb intensifiers Comparative and superlative intensifiers; irregular adverbs Definition of prepositions and prepositional phrases; objects of prepositions Modifiers; adjectives and adverbs Identify and correctly use words that express strong feelings Correctly identify and use direct objects
49
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Interview Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Letter Writing Letter Writing Narrative Writing Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response Letter Writing Written Response Narrative Writing Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response
Language Usage V Grade Level 5
30 31 32 33
Lesson Title Grammar Improvements 1 Grammar Improvements 2 Grammar Improvements 3 Grammar Improvements 4
34
Sentences 1
35 36 37 38 39
41
Sentences 2 Sentences 3 Sentences 4 Sentences 5 Conjunctions Subject/Verb Agreement Parts of Speech
42
Problem Words
43
Parallelism
44
Word Application
45
Capitalization
40
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Avoiding unnecessary shifts in tense
Essay: Written Response
Identify incorrect usage of articles
Essay: Journal Writing
Identifying double negatives
Essay: Written Response
Identifying subjects and predicates
Essay: Written Response
Sentence definition; complete sentences; run-on sentences; sentence fragments; word order of sentences Simple and compound sentences Declarative, imperative, exclamatory and interrogative sentences Diagramming simple and compound sentences Applying diagramming to sentences Correctly use conjunctions in sentences
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Recognize and use correct subject/verb agreement
Essay: Written Response
Recognize and use the eight parts of speech in sentences Recognize and correctly use words such as: accept, except; affect, effect; are, our; its, it’s; your, you’re; bad, badly; good, well; real, really; beside, besides; from, off; in, into Making a series of items; words and phrases follow a pattern Recognize that words represent ideas, experiences, objects, events, and actions; naming and describing action words Review of capitalization rules
Essay: Activity
50
Essay: Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response Written Response Diagram Written Response
Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VI Grade Level 6
1
Lesson Title Nouns 1
2
Nouns 2
3 4
Pronouns 1 Pronouns 2
5
Pronouns 3
6
Pronouns 4
7 8
Verbs 1 Verbs 2
9
Verbs 3
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Verbs 4 Verbs 5 Verbs 6 Verbs 7 Adjectives 1 Adjectives 2 Adjectives 3
17
Adverbs 1
18 19 20
Adverbs 2 Prepositions 1 Prepositions 2
21
Conjunctions
22
Interjections Parts of Speech Review Sentences 1 Sentences 2 Sentences 3
23 24 25 26
Lesson Content Definition and use of common, proper, concrete, abstract and compound nouns Singular, plural, and possessive nouns; how to avoid confusing possessives and plurals Pronouns and antecedent definition and examples Subject and object pronouns Subject nouns and pronouns; object pronouns; compound subjects; compound direct objects Review of pronouns and antecedents; singular and plural pronouns and antecedents Action, linking, and state-of-being verbs Main verbs; helping verbs; verb phrases; contractions Transitive and intransitive verbs; determining the difference between intransitive and linking verbs Principal parts; present, past, and future; present and past participles Perfect tenses; regular verbs Irregular verbs; past and past participle forms of irregular verbs Easily confused verbs including: may/can, sit/set; lie/lay, and rise/raise Articles; demonstrative; predicate adjective Proper adjective; suffix endings Degrees of comparison Adverb questions (how, when, where, to what extent); modifies verbs, adjectives, other adverbs Degrees of comparison including positive and negative comparisons Prepositions; objects; prepositional phrases Adjectives and adverbs as prepositional phrases Definition and use of conjunctions including conjunction pairs either/or, neither/nor, and not only/but also Definition and use of interjections
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Writing Written Response Activity Written Response Written Response Research Speech Writing
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Research Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Review and use of all eight parts of speech
Essay: Activity
Sentences; fragments; run-on sentences Sentence types: declarative, imperative, interrogative, and exclamatory Identifying simple and complete subjects, and predicates
Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Letter Writing
51
Language Usage VI Grade Level 6 Lesson Title 27
Sentences 4
28
Sentences 5
29 30
Sentence Review Diagramming
31
Mechanics 1
32 33 34
Mechanics 2 Mechanics 3 Mechanics 4
35
Mechanics 5
36 37 38 39
Mechanics Mechanics Mechanics Mechanics
40 41 42 43 44
6 7 8 9
Mechanics 10 Easily Confused Words Double Negatives Agreement Parallelism
Lesson Content Finding the subjects in imperative and exclamatory sentences; the understood subject Subject and predicate complements; subject and predicate adjectives; direct objects Review of all types of sentences; direct and indirect objects Sentence diagramming Capitalization of titles and initials; nouns of direct address; geographical capitalization; capitalization in businesses and government Rules for capitalization in titles and books; direct and indirect quotes; poetry Business and friendly letter parts; capitalization and punctuation rules Reports, outlines, and bibliographies; elements of research Review of end mark punctuation; abbreviations of titles, streets, organizations, etc., including acronyms Commas with introductory words and appositives Commas with dates, with abbreviations, and in a series Commas with conjunctions and transitions as well as clauses Use of quotation marks in writing dialogue Guidelines for using colons in business letters and in writing time; using the apostrophe Homophones; word combinations then/than, beside/besides, principle/principal, between/among, and good/well Identifying double negatives; using not in contractions Subject and verb agreement; compound subjects and verb agreement Making a series of items; words and phrases follow a pattern
52
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Illustration Essay: Diagram Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Research Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Response Letter Writing Narrative Writing Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VII Grade Level 7
Lesson Title 1
The Writing Process
2
Parts of Speech
3
Nouns 1
4
Nouns 2
5
Verbs 1
6 7 8
Verbs 2 Verbs 3 Verbs 4
9
Verbs 5
10
Pronouns 1
11
Pronouns 2
12
Pronouns 3
13
Adjectives 1
14
Adjectives 2
15
Adverbs 1
16
Adverbs 2
17
Prepositions
18
Conjunctions
Lesson Content Identification of pre-writing or brainstorming, drafting, editing, proofreading, and publishing; common errors in writing Recognize and use the eight parts of speech in sentences Definition and use of nouns; nouns of direct address; using punctuation with appositives and identify the noun that is renamed; common and proper nouns; commonly used abstract nouns Singular and plural nouns; identify need to punctuate using apostrophes; the use of an apostrophe to show possession; identify and use words that show plural and possessive forms Definition and use of verbs; identify verb usage in sentences; regular, helping, linking, main, auxiliary, irregular, action, colorful and tricky verbs The verb tenses; verb conjugations; avoiding unnecessary shifts in tense Transitive and intransitive verbs; active and passive voice Progressive tense verbs Use of complements; completers; direct and indirect objects; predicate adjectives and predicate nominatives Definitions of pronouns; correctly identify a pronoun in a sentence; direct and indirect objects; predicate nominative; first, second, and third person pronouns and their antecedents Personal pronouns; correctly substitute nouns for pronouns; nominative and objective case pronouns; possessive pronouns and compound personal pronouns Interrogative, demonstrative, relative, and indefinite pronouns Adjective definition and use, proper adjectives, and predicate adjectives; definite and indefinite articles Forms of adjective comparison; adjective intensifiers; using comparative and superlative forms of adjectives Adverb definition and use; double negatives Negative words and adverbs; adverb intensifiers; comparative and superlative forms of adverbs; identify tricky adverbs Using prepositional phrases as adverbs; using prepositional phrases as adjectives; identify and correctly use prepositions; identify words modified by prepositions and identify objects of prepositions Correctly use conjunctions in sentences
53
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VII Grade Level 7
Lesson Title 19
Interjections
20
Sentences 1
21
Sentences 2
22
Sentences 3
23
Sentences 4
24
Sentences 5
25
Noun Clauses
26
Subject/Verb Agreement
27
Verbals 1
28
Verbals 2
29
Verbals 3
30
Punctuation 1
31
Punctuation 2
32
Punctuation 3
33
Punctuation 4
34
Punctuation 5
35
Punctuation 6
Lesson Content Identify and correctly use words that express strong feelings; using punctuation with interjections Sentence definition, word order of sentences, identifying subjects and predicates; complete subjects and complete predicates; natural and inverted word order Complete sentences, sentence fragments, and run-on sentences; identify the declarative, imperative, interrogative, and exclamatory sentences Independent and dependent clauses; compound subjects and predicates; conjunctions; coordinating conjunctions Simple and compound sentence diagramming; parts of speech Complex sentences; compound complex sentences; subordinate and independent clauses; adverb and adjective clauses; compound-complex sentences Adjective clauses; the use of a comma after introductory words, phrases, or clauses Recognize and use correct subject/verb agreement; compound subject; indefinite pronoun Identify past and present participles; identify participial phrases; finding the noun that is modified; using commas with participle phrases Identify and determine the use of a gerund in a sentence (subject, direct object, indirect object, appositive, object of a preposition) Identify the adjective and adverb used as an infinitive; find the word modified, determine the use of the infinitive in a sentence The use of a comma in bibliographic references; the use of punctuation in direct quotations; the use of abbreviations in measuring, initials, days of the week, months of the year, and the states Punctuation for appositives, introductory clauses, and nouns of direct address Punctuation for quotations; writing dialogue; split quotations; indirect quotes; titles of short works; quotations within quotations Capitalization of businesses, geographic features, and days of the week Capitalization of first word in a sentence and proper nouns; pronouns and titles and initials; family titles, and greeting and closing of a letter; abbreviations First word of direct quotations; how to capitalize direct quotes and titles; using colons and hyphens
54
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Diagram Essay: Activity Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VII Grade Level 7
Lesson Title 36
Punctuation 7
37
Word Usage
38
Parallelism
Lesson Content First word of main topic and subtopic in an outline; titles of books, poems, stories, reports, outlines, songs, magazine articles, and chapters Recognize that words represent ideas, experiences, objects, events, and actions; naming and describing action words; confusing and tricky words Making a series of items; words and phrases follow a pattern
55
Essays & Media Essay: Research Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VIII Grade Level 8
1 2 3
Lesson Title Nouns 1 Nouns 2 Nouns 3
4
Pronouns
5
Verbs 1
6
Verbs 2
7
Verbs 3
8
Verbs 4
9
Verbs 5
10
Adjectives
11
Adverbs Conjunction/ Interjection Prepositions Parts of Speech Review
12 13 14 15
Sentences 1
16 17
Sentences 2 Sentences 3
18
Sentences 4
19 20 21 22 23
Sentence Types Complements 1 Complements 2 Appositives Pronoun Case
24
Verbals 1
Lesson Content Definition and use of proper, common, abstract and concrete nouns Singular nouns; plural nouns Possessive nouns; plural and possessive nouns Definition and use of personal, indefinite, interrogative, reflexive, intensive and demonstrative pronouns Definition and use of verbs; main and helping verbs; verb phrase; identify verb usage in sentences Action; linking verbs Present, past, future tenses; present, past, and future perfect tenses; regular and irregular verbs Special verbs review of be, do and have; correct usage of may and can, and would and could Transitive verbs; intransitive verbs Definition and use of comparative and superlative intensifiers; definite and indefinite articles Definition and use of comparative and superlative intensifiers Definition and use of conjunctions; definition, use and punctuation of interjections and interrupters; coordinating and correlative conjunctions Definition and use of a prepositional phrase, adjective and adverb phrases Recognize and use the eight parts of speech in sentences Sentence definition; complete and simple subject; identify complete and simple predicate Identify complete, run-on, and fragment sentences Declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences Recognize and use correct subject/verb agreement; compound subject; indefinite pronoun; collective nouns Identifying simple and compound sentences Direct and indirect objects Predicate nominatives and predicate adjectives Identifying and punctuating appositives and nouns of direct address Using subjective, objective, and possessive case pronouns Identify and determine the use of a gerund in a sentence; subject, direct object, indirect object, appositive, and object of a preposition
56
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Interview Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Journal Writing Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Letter Writing Written Response Written Response Written Response Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VIII Grade Level 8
25 26 27
Lesson Title Verbals 2 Verbals 3 Verbals Review
28
Clauses 1
29
Clauses 2
30
Clauses 3
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Clauses Review Diagramming 1 Diagramming 2 Capitalization Punctuation 1 Punctuation 2 Punctuation 3
38
Punctuation 4
39
Quotations
40
Letter Writing
41 42 43
Outlining Parallelism Writing
44
Problem Words
45
Word Application
Lesson Content Identify past and present participles; identify participial phrases Identify the adjective and adverb used as an infinitive Review of gerunds, participles, and infinitives Identification and punctuation of adjective clauses; independent and dependent clauses; restrictive and non-restrictive clauses Identification and punctuation of adverb clauses; independent and dependent clauses; restrictive and non-restrictive clauses Identification and punctuation of noun clauses; independent and dependent clauses; restrictive and non-restrictive clauses Review of adjective, adverb, and noun clauses Diagramming simple and compound sentences Diagramming compound and compound-complex sentences First word in a sentence; proper nouns and pronouns; personal titles Use of the parentheses; dash and hyphen Commas in dates, series, introductory words, and compound sentences End marks of sentences; abbreviations and initials Use of a colon; using a semi-colon with conjunctive adverbs to separate compound sentences Punctuation and capitalization in direct quotations Letter format; capitalization and punctuation in the greeting and closing of a letter Capitalization and punctuation in outline and bibliographic reference Making a series of items; words and phrases follow a pattern Recognizing tense and point of view shift Recognize and correctly use words such as: accept, except; affect, effect; are, our; its, it’s; your, you’re; bad, badly; good, well; real, really; beside, besides; from, off; in, into; between, among; bring, take; fewer, less; like, as; who, whom; imply, infer; and exact, exactly Recognize that words represent ideas, experiences, objects, events, and actions; naming and describing action words; writing style, choice of words, slang, colloquialisms, and informal language
57
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Response Diagram Diagram Narrative Writing Research Narrative Writing Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Research Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Learning Letter Sounds Grade Level Kindergarten A+LS Learning Letter Sounds introduces students to the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
letters in order of their frequency of use as well as in alphabetic order the letters o,s,t,a,r,e, that appear in 50% of words in the English language the letters n,i,l,u,c,p, that complete learning of 80% of the letters in the English language vowel combination with consonants letter pairs for ease of learning matching letters identifying letters recalling letters from memory letters in the context of words in which the name of the letter is actually heard, e.g., /a/ in able, /n/ in end letter learning in initial, medial, and final positions learning the sound-symbol relationships of letters logical and systematic transition from speech to print initial consonants digraphs blends common phonograms use of comparison and contrast, transfer, analogy, and onset-rime sound within the context of whole words
58
Learning Letter Sounds™ Grade Level K
A+LS™ Learning Letter Sounds (LLS) is designed expressly for kindergartners or individuals who have no reading skills. LLS is designed to teach learners the names and sounds of the letters of the alphabet and do more to prepare them for reading instruction at a higher level. The instructional system is made up of a series of lesson clusters, consisting of three instructional lessons and a cumulative review. In addition, the total experience exposes learners to a wide range of concepts that enhance language development. English language learners will come away with a greatly expanded vocabulary. This program has a long history of success in helping children learn to read.
•
Lessons contain a pretest, instruction, mastery test, and cumulative review. All lessons are narrated to provide clear instructions and phonetic pronunciation to students.
•
LLS is the re-release of a program originally designed by Dr. Donald Durrell, one of the pioneers of modern research in reading. It is based on principles identified by the National Reading Panel, and incorporates phonemic awareness and phonic instruction, focusing on the names and sounds of letters and blending.
•
LLS provides extensive, individualized instruction designed for mastery of the concepts being taught in an engaging environment. The program is designed expressly for children who do not yet read, and utilizes a greatly simplified interface.
59
Learning Letter Sounds™ Grade Level K
•
Vowels are combined with consonants, and letters are paired for ease of learning. Letter learning tasks vary in difficulty. Tasks, from easier to more challenging, are: matching letters, identifying letters named, and recalling letters from memory. Learning letter names in this manner does not preclude the necessity for also learning alphabetical order.
•
Letters are first introduced in the context of words in which the name of the letter is actually heard. Examples: letter /a/ in able, letter /n/ in end, and letter /i/ in ride. This technique utilizes the child’s mastery of oral language and logically transfers that skill into an understanding of the alphabetic system.
•
Twenty-two of the twenty-six letters of the alphabet permit letter name-sound phonics; the names of only h, q, w, and y do not contain their sounds. The letter name-sound process is used each time a new letter is introduced (with the exception of h, q, w, and y). As each lesson progresses the student encounters the letters used in words in which the letters do not say their names and in initial, medial, and final positions. Awareness of separate sounds in spoken words has sequences of ease; letter name-sounds are easier to identify than phonemes; sounds at the beginning of words are easier than at the end or middle of the word; larger clusters of sound, such as rhyming phonograms or syllables are easier than smaller phonetic units.
•
After the student has mastered letter names, that knowledge is put to use learning the sound-symbol relationships of those letters. The remaining fifty-two lessons are devoted to logically and systematically making the transition from speech to print. Initial consonants, digraphs, and blends are presented first. These elements are blended with vowels within common phonograms, employing comparison and contrast, transfer, analogy, onset-rime examples and other effective instructional strategies. Sounds are never distorted by being presented in isolation. The student always hears the sound within the context of whole words that appear with high frequency in the speaking vocabulary of primary-age children.
•
An Internet connection is not required for completion of this course.
60
Learning Letter Sounds™ Grade Level K
•
Pretest - Each lesson starts with a pretest consisting of three test items for each terminal objective in a lesson. Most lessons have two terminal objectives and six pretest items per lesson, (the pattern is three objectives in Lessons 49 through 69, but the ratio of 3:1 remains the same). If a student misses any pretest item, he or she is automatically assigned the instructional component of that lesson. If the student answers correctly on all items, he or she will move on to the next pretest in the sequence, and the lesson will be considered mastered.
•
Instruction - All lessons contain at least 74 instructional frames that systematically present the selected content. As the student progresses through each lesson, all responses are recorded by the management system for teacher review.
•
Mastery Test - When the instructional component is completed, the mastery test is presented to the student. This test has five items per objective. If the student responds correctly to four or more items (80%), the lesson will be considered mastered, and the student will move on to the next lesson in the sequence. If 80% is not achieved, the lesson is automatically repeated to provide the student additional reinforcement during the next session. The master criterion of 80% was determined by the scientific-based research of Dr. Durrell. Research showed that no less than 80% accuracy is required for mastery at a level sufficient to assure ongoing learning and success. Alteration of the 80% criteria for mastery is not recommended.
•
Cumulative Review - Every fourth lesson in Learning Letter Sounds is a cumulative review of the material taught in the previous three lessons. The lessons are planned so that children who know the material move through the lesson quickly, while those who need more instruction work through an easier and slower paced sequence.
61
Learning Letter Sounds Grade Level K Lesson Title 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
os, OS at, AT er, ER Review in, IN ul, UL cp, CP Review md, MD hb, HB yf, YF Review gv, GV xw, XW kz, KZ qj, QJ Review
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
/s/, /m/ /b/, /t/ /p/, /f/ Review /r/, /d/ /c/, /n/ /h/, /l/ Review /g/, /v/ /k/, / j/ /z/, /w/ Review /y/, /q/ /ch/, /th/ /sh/, /wh/
Lesson Content Introduction of Letter Names Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase o and s. Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase a and t. Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase e and r. Review of lessons 1, 2, and 3 Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase i and n Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase u and l Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase c and p Review of lessons 5, 6, and 7 Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase m and d Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase h and b Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase y and f Review of lessons 9, 10, and 11 Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase g and v Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase x and w Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase k and z Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase q and j Review of lessons 13, 14, 15, and 16 Letter Sounds Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /s/ and /m/ Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /b/ and /t/ Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /p/ and /f/ Review of lessons 18, 19, and 20 Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /r/ and /d/ Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /c/ and /n/ Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /h/ and /l/ Review of lessons 22, 23, and 24 Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /g/ and /v/ Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /k/ and /j/ Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /z/ and /w/ Review of lessons 26, 27, and 28 Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /y/ and /q/ Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /ch/ and /th/ Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /sh/ and /wh/
62
Learning Letter Sounds Grade Level K
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
Lesson Title Review /sp/, /sl/ /sc/, /sm/ /st/, /sk/ Review /sn/, /sq/ /sw/, /tw/ /br/, /tr/ Review /gr/, /fr/ /dr/, /cr/ /pr/, /wr/ Review /cl/, /bl/ /fl/, /pl/ /str/, /scr/ Review /ay/, /ail/, /ain/ /ake/, /ave/, /ate/ /eat/, /ear/, /eep/ Review /ide/, /ice/, /ine/ /ow/, /oke/, /old/ /ook/, /oop/, /ore Review /ap/, /an/, /at/ /ack/, /ash/, /ank /ent/, /ell/, /est/ Review /ip/, /in/, /it/ /ick/, /ill/, /ing/ /ot/, /op/, /ock/ Review /ub/, /um/, /ug/
Lesson Content Review of lessons 30, 31, and 32 Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Review of lessons 34, 35, and 36 Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Review of lessons 38, 39, and 40 Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Review of lessons 42, 43, and 44 Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Review of lessons 46, 47, and 48 Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Review of lessons 50, 51, and 52 Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Review of lessons 54, 55, and 56 Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Review of lessons 58, 59, and 60 Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Teaches recognition of the sounds made Review of lessons 62, 63, and 64 Teaches recognition of the sounds made
63
by the letters /sp/ and /sl/ by the letters /sc/ and /sm/ by the letters /st/ and /sk/ by the letters /sn/ and /sq/ by the letters /sw/ and /tw/ by the letters /br/ and /tr/ by the letters /gr/ and /fr/ by the letters /dr/ and /cr/ by the letters /pr/ and /wr / by the letters /cl/ and /bl/ by the letters /fl/ and /pl/ by the letters /str/ and /scr/ by the letters /ay/, /ail/, and /ain/ by the letters /ake/, /ave/, and /ate/ by the letters /eat/, /ear/, and /eep/ by the letters /ide/, /ice/, and /ine/ by the letters /ow/, /oke/, and /old/ by the letters /ook/, /oop/, and /ore/ by the letters /ap/, /an/, and /at/ by the letters /ack/, /ash/, and /ank/ by the letters /ent/, /ell/, and /est/ by the letters /ip/, /in/, and /it/ by the letters /ick/, /ill/, and /ing/ by the letters /ot/, /op/, and /ock/ by the letters /ub/, /um/, and /ug/
Learning Letter Sounds Grade Level K
67 68 69
Lesson Title /uck/, /ump/, /ush/ /aw/, /are/, /all/ Review
Lesson Content Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /uck/, /ump/, and /ush/ Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /aw/, /are/, and /all/ Review of lessons 66, 67, and 68
64
Storybook Phonics I and II Grade Levels K - 2 A+LS Storybook Phonics introduces students to the following: Storybook Phonics I • • • • • • • •
focus on fluency with phonics and oral reading activities that reinforce words from the stories activities that facilitate reading comprehension interactive games blending and segmenting skills learning to read initial consonants initial consonant clusters
Storybook Phonics II • • • • • • • •
focus on fluency with phonics and oral reading activities that reinforce words from the stories activities that facilitate reading comprehension interactive games blending and segmenting skills becoming a reader initial consonant clusters vowel and long vowel phonemes
65
Storybook Phonics Grade Levels K-2
Storybook Phonics produced by Cambridge HitachiSoft Educational Solutions Plc, is an exciting addition to the A+nyWhere Learning System® courseware. This title offers a story-based approach to reading fluency with stories using regular phonemic patterns. Storybook Phonics is ideal for independent and team study with computers. Storybook Phonics is also compatible with interactive whiteboards for whole-class instruction.
Storybook Phonics I and II •
All thirty stories in the combined title contain a study guide, a practice and mastery test, and essay.
•
Most essays and phonics extension assignments include a variety of activities as well as written responses designed to enhance student learning.
•
All stories are voiced, beautifully illustrated in full color, and include character animations. Words are highlighted in synchronicity with the narrator's voice. As students listen to the stories, they are encouraged to read along with the narrator. The primary purpose of the books is to promote reading fluency.
•
Each lesson contains a variety of fun, interactive games such as drag and drop, picture to word matching, and many more.
66
Storybook Phonics Grade Levels K-2
Storybook Phonics produced by Cambridge HitachiSoft Educational Solutions Plc, is an exciting addition to the A+nyWhere Learning System® courseware. This title offers a story-based approach to reading fluency with stories using regular phonemic patterns. Storybook Phonics is ideal for independent and team study with computers. Storybook Phonics is also compatible with interactive whiteboards for whole-class instruction.
Storybook Phonics I and II •
All thirty stories in the combined title contain a study guide, a practice and mastery test, and essay.
•
Most essays and phonics extension assignments include a variety of activities as well as written responses designed to enhance student learning.
•
All stories are voiced, beautifully illustrated in full color, and include character animations. Words are highlighted in synchronicity with the narrator's voice. As students listen to the stories, they are encouraged to read along with the narrator. The primary purpose of the books is to promote reading fluency.
•
Each lesson contains a variety of fun, interactive games such as drag and drop, picture to word matching, and many more.
67
Storybook Phonics Grade Levels K-2
•
The Storybook Phonics books focus on fluency with phonics and oral reading.
•
The design of the phonics extension activities reinforces words from the stories and provides activities that facilitate reading comprehension.
•
Interactive games are designed to enhance blending and segmenting skills for fluent reading and accurate spelling.
•
Due to the interactive nature of Storybook Phonics activities, there are a few specific software requirements: o
Storybook Phonics requires a web browser. The following are recommended: Microsoft Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 or higher, Safari ® versions 2.0 or higher.
o
The interactive activities of the digital books and games require a web browser equipped with the Adobe® Flash® and Shockwave plug-ins. Available at: www.adobe.com (select Get ADOBE FLASH PLAYER and Get Shockwave Player). Note: Software requires Shockwave Player 11.0
o
An Internet connection is required.
68
Storybook Phonics Grade Levels K-2
The lessons for Storybook Phonics are divided into two courses, Storybook Phonics I and Storybook Phonics II.
Storybook Phonics I
Storybook Phonics II
Lessons 1 - 15
Lessons 1 – 15
Beginning to Read and Becoming a Reader
Becoming a Reader
Focus on Initial Consonants
Focus on Initial Consonant Clusters
Focus on Initial Consonant Clusters
Focus on Vowel and Long Vowel Phonemes
69
Storybook Phonics I Grade Levels K-2 Story Title 1
2
3
Lesson Content
Buzzing Bug
Consonants + ug and the letters b, g, m, j, u, r
Essay description: On a piece of paper, draw a picture that shows what you think the bug would have done if it had not gone out the window. Phonics extension description: Write four rhyming words using these letters: b, g, m, j, u, r (Hint: Use words from the story.)
Jet Goes Fishing
Initial consonants + et
Essay description: Write a story about a fun time you have had with your pet. If you do not have a pet, write about a friend’s pet or a pet you would like to have. Phonics extension description: Write all of the words from the story that rhyme with Jet. Draw a picture to go with each word.
Lost in the Fog
Initial consonants + og and the letters g, f, d, j, o, z, and l
Essay description: In this story, we met an alien named Zog. Write a story about Zog. Tell where he is from and why he came to Earth. Draw a picture of Zog’s planet. Phonics extension description: Write five rhyming words using these letters: g, f, d, j, o, z, l (Hint: Use words from the story.)
The Cat and the Rat
Initial consonants + at
5
A Run in the Sun
Initial consonants + un
6
Dan's Pancake
Initial consonants + an
4
Essay description: Because the rat lives in Fat Cat’s home, they are sure to see each other again. Write about another time that Fat Cat sees the rat. What will Fat Cat do to the rat? What will the rat do to Fat Cat? Phonics extension description: This story has many words that end with at. Make a flip book with words that end with at. Include words from the story and some of your own words as well. Essay description: The children in this story had fun running in the sun. What do you like to do on a sunny day? Draw a picture of what you like to do on a sunny day. Write a sentence telling about your picture. Phonics extension description: Write five rhyming words using these letters: g, r, s, u, f, n (Hint: Use words from the story.) Essay description: The pancake is now in the baker’s van. Write about what you think will happen next. Draw a picture to go with your story. Phonics extension description: Make a word wheel for words that end with an. Use words from this story, as well as some words of your own.
70
Essays & Media Essay: Illustration Phonics: Write Rhyming Words Essay:
Written Response Phonics: Write Rhyming Words Essay:
Story Writing Illustration Phonics: Write Rhyming Words
Essay:
Written Response Phonics: Create a Flip Book Essay:
Illustration Written Response Phonics: Write Rhyming Words Essay: Illustration Story Writing Phonics: Create a Word Wheel
Storybook Phonics I Grade Levels K-2 Story Title
Lesson Content
7
Puppy Din
Initial consonants + in
8
Ten Gingerbread Men
Initial consonants + en
9
Granny Dot's Pot
Initial consonants + ot
10
Molly Mop
Initial consonants + op
11
Sam's Cap
Initial consonants + ap
Zanzibar Zip
Initial consonants + ip
12
Essay description: Draw a picture of a fun party that you have had or been to. Tell about the party. Phonics extension description: Make a word wheel for words that end with in. Use words from this story as well as some words of your own. Essay description: Imagine that the gingerbread men had not been eaten by the sheep. Where else could the gingerbread men have gone? Continue the story and draw pictures. Phonics extension description: Write all the words from the story that rhyme with Ben. Draw a picture to go with each word. Essay description: Draw a picture of something you like to eat. Tell how you would make it. Phonics extension description: This story has many words that end with ot. Make a flip book with words that end with ot. Include words from the story and some of your own words as well. Essay description: Molly Mop came out to play with the toys in Tom’s toy shop. What do you think they will do? Draw a picture of Molly Mop and the toys playing. Phonics extension description: This story has many words that end with op. Make a flip book with words that end with op. Include words from the story and some of your own words as well. Essay description: What do you think Sam will do next? On a piece of paper, draw a picture showing what you think will happen. Phonics extension description: The words cap, nap, gap, and tap are rhyming words. Can you think of some other words that rhyme with cap and tap? Make a list of those words, and draw pictures to go with your words. Essay description: At the end of the story Pete, Pip, and Zip are having a good time enjoying their food. Now that Pete, Pip, and Zip are friends, what do you think they will do next? Write a sentence and draw a picture explaining what you think they will do next. Phonics extension description: The words Pip, ship, nip, lip, and chip are all rhyming words. What other words also rhyme with these words? Make a list of your rhyming words. Write three of your rhyming words in your own sentences.
71
Essays & Media Essay: Illustration Written Response Phonics: Create a Word Wheel Essay: Illustration Story Writing Phonics: Illustration Write Rhyming Words Essay: Descriptive Writing Illustration Phonics: Create a Flip Book Essay: Illustration Phonics: Create a Flip Book
Essay: Illustration Phonics: Illustration Word List Essay:
Illustration Story Writing Phonics: Word List Sentence Writing
Storybook Phonics I Grade Levels K-2 Story Title
13
The Blob Can Blink!
Initial consonant clusters bl, cl, fl, gl, pl
14
The Crocodile's Sky Snack
Initial s+ consonant clusters
15
The Tricky Troll and Billy Goats Gruff
Initial consonant clusters br, cr, fr, gr, tr
Lesson Content Essay description: Continue the adventures of the little black blob by drawing a picture on a piece of paper and telling about something else it would do. Be sure to use words that begin with bl, cl, fl, gl, or pl. Phonics extension description: The sounds /bl/, /cl/, /fl/, /gl/, and /pl/ are used in words throughout this story to explain things the little black blob saw and did. Make a list of the words in this story that make those sounds. What other words are spelled with bl, cl, fl, gl, and pl? Write those words on another list. Essay description: In this story, the crocodile tried a new snack. Write about a time that you tried something new to eat. What was it? What did you think about it? Draw a picture of it. Phonics extension description: This story has many words that start with sn, st, sl, sk, sm, and sw. Try to find many of these words in a magazine or a newspaper article. Circle the words that you find. Read the words. Essay description: The billy goats like to eat fresh green grass. The story describes the grass as green, munchy, fresh, crisp, and crunchy. What do you like to eat? Write a paragraph about your favorite food using as many describing words as you can. Draw a picture of the food that you described. Phonics extension description: Make a chart labeled with br, cr, fr, gr, and tr. Write words from the story under the correct headings.
72
Essays & Media
Essay:
Illustration Story Writing Phonics: Word List
Essay:
Descriptive Story Illustration Phonics: Find and Circle Words Essay:
Illustration Paragraph Writing Phonics: Create a Chart Word List
Storybook Phonics II Grade Levels 1-2 Story Title The Giant of the Sky
Final consonant clusters -nt, -st, -lt
The Junk Robot
Final consonant clusters -nd, -nk, -ld
3
Wisp
Final consonant clusters -lp, -mp, -sp
4
Charlie Chimpanzee
Long vowel phonemes /ee/ and /oa/
5
Shy Dragon and White Knight
Long vowel phoneme /ie/
1
2
Lesson Content Essay description: Have you ever been afraid? Write about a time that you were afraid. Tell what scared you and what you did about it. Draw a picture to go along with your story. Phonics extension description: This story has many words that end with -nt, -st, and -lt. See how many of these words you can find in a magazine or newspaper article. Circle the words that you find. Read the words. Essay description: If you made a junk robot of your own, what would it look like? Draw a picture of your junk robot. Then write a paragraph describing what your robot was made from. Phonics extension description: Make a list of all the things the junk robot can do. Underline all the words that end with -nk or -nd. Can you think of anything else the robot can do or would like that ends with the same letters? Add those words to your list. Essay description: Wisp had to be very brave to stand up for herself and not be bullied by a dog that was bigger than she was. Think about a time you have had to be very brave. Write a story about your experience. Phonics extension description: This story has words that end in -lp, -mp, and -sp. Make a list of the words from this story that make those sounds. Then think of three more words that make each of those sounds and add them to your list. Essay description: The Queen Bee wanted to teach Charlie not to steal. Do you think Charlie learned his lesson? Explain your answer. Phonics extension description: This story has many words that make the long /e/ sound and the long /o/ sound. Make a list of long /e/ words and another list of long /o/ words. Write words from the story on the appropriate list. How many different ways of making the long /e/ and long /o/ sounds are there? Underline the letters that make the long /e/ and long /o/ sounds in each word. (For example: ee, ea, ie, oa) Essay description: Now that the white knight and the dragon are friends, what do you think will happen next? Write and draw a picture explaining what the white knight and the dragon will do next. Phonics extension description: This story has a lot of words that make the long /i/ sound. Make a list of all the words you can find that make the long /i/ sound. Can you think of any other words that make the long /i/ sound? Make a list of those words.
73
Essays & Media Essay:
Illustration Written Response Phonics: Circle Words in a Newspaper Essay:
Illustration Paragraph Writing Phonics: Word List Word Underline
Essay: Story Writing Phonics: Word List
Essay:
Written Response Phonics: Word List Word Underline
Essay:
Illustration Written Response Phonics: Word List
Storybook Phonics II Grade Levels 1-2 Story Title
6
The Wind and the Sun
Long vowel phonemes /ai/and /ue/
7
The Popcorn Boy
Vowel phoneme /oi/
8
Town Mouse and Country Mouse
Vowel phoneme /ow/
9
A Star in a Marmalade Jar
Vowel phoneme /ar/
10
Billy Bear and Pear Tree Fairy
Vowel phoneme /air/
Lesson Content Essay description: Can you think of a test that the wind could have won? Write about the test. Phonics extension description: In this story, the long /u/ sound is made using different letter patterns. For example, oo is used in the word swooping, ew is used in the word new, and ue is used in the word blue. How many letter patterns are used to make the long /a/ sound in this story? Write examples of each. Essay description: At the end of the story, Roy Troy’s cat is holding a box of popcorn and winking at him. Write a paragraph explaining what you think will happen next. Draw a picture to illustrate your paragraph. Phonics extension description: The letters oi and oy make the same sound. This story contains many words with those letters. Make a list of all the words in the story with oi and oy. Read the words. Essay description: Write a paragraph about where you live. Describe why you like to live there. Draw a picture to go with your paragraph. Phonics extension description: The letters ou and ow often make the same sound. This story contains many words with those letters. Make a list of all the words in the story with ou and ow. Read the words. Can you find any words in which ow makes the long /o/ sound? Write the words you find. Essay description: The star in this story made the farmer’s wishes come true. If you set a star free like the farmer did, what do you think would happen? What kind of wishes would you want to come true? Write your answers in complete sentences and draw a picture to illustrate what you wrote. Phonics extension description: The words star, marmalade, and jar have the sound /ar/. Look in a favorite book or a magazine for words which contain the /ar/ sound. Make a list of the words you find. Write five of your words in a sentence. Essay description: In this story, the fairy made a magic chair for Billy Bear. If you had a magic chair, where would you fly to? Write a story about your adventures on a magic chair. Draw a picture to go with your story. Phonics extension description: Make a chart with the headings air, ear, and are. Write the words from the story under the proper heading. Which column had the most words? Read the words.
74
Essays & Media Essay:
Written Response Phonics: Letter Patterns Written Response Essay:
Illustration Paragraph Writing Phonics: Word List Essay:
Illustration Paragraph Writing Phonics: Word List Essay:
Illustration Sentence Writing Phonics: Word List Sentence Writing Essay:
Illustration Story Writing Phonics: Create a Chart Word List
Storybook Phonics II Grade Levels 1-2 Story Title
11
12
13
14
Gertie the Goat
Vowel phoneme /ur/
The Haunted House
Vowel phonemes /or/ and /au/
The Magic Ear
Vowel phoneme /ear/
The Magic Porridge Pot
Vowel phoneme /oo/
Lesson Content Essay description: In this story, Gertie the Goat liked to eat many different things. Write about one of your favorite things to eat. Tell why you like it. Then describe how you think it is made. Also, draw a picture of your favorite food. Phonics extension description: In this story, the letters er, ir, and ur all make the same sound. Make a chart with the headings er, ir, and ur. Then look in a favorite book or a magazine for words that make the same sound. Write the words you find under the headings on your chart. Read the words you wrote. Essay description: Paul and Laura were in the house for just a few minutes. They were not able to see what the rest of the house looked like. Using your imagination, write a paragraph describing what the rest of the haunted house was like. Phonics extension essay: This story has many words with the /au/ and /or/ sounds. Find the words in the story that make the /au/ sound and the /or/ sound. Make a list of the words you found. Write five sentences using words from your list. Essay description: Write a paragraph about some other things you think Lug can do with his magic ear. Draw a picture to go with your paragraph. Phonics extension essay: The words hear, tears, and appear all have the sound /ear/. What other words in this story also have the sound /ear/? Make a list of the words you find. Write five complete sentences using the ear words you found in the story. Essay description: Pretend the little girl could not remember how to make the magic cooking pot stop cooking porridge. Write a paragraph explaining what would happen. Draw a picture to go with your paragraph. Phonics extension description: How many oo words can you find in the story? Write down the words that you find and draw a picture to go with each one.
75
Essays & Media Essay:
Illustration Written Response Phonics: Create a Chart Word List
Essay:
Paragraph Writing Phonics: Word List Sentence Writing Essay:
Illustration Paragraph Writing Phonics: Word List Sentence Writing Essay:
Illustration Paragraph Writing Phonics: Illustration Word List
Storybook Phonics II Grade Levels 1-2 Story Title
15
Peacock's New Name
Vowel digraph ea
Lesson Content Essay description: In this story, Peacock thought he was very grand and should be given special treatment because of his beautiful feathers. How do you think he changed after the fox tried to eat him? Explain your answer. Phonics extension description: The letters ea make two different sounds in this story. In the word peacock, ea makes the long /e/ sound. In the word head, ea makes the short /e/ sound. Make a chart labeled with long /e/ sounds and short /e/ sounds. List all of the ea words from the story under the correct heading. Try to add words of your own to the chart.
76
Essays & Media Essay:
Written Response Phonics: Create a Chart Word List
Reading I - VIII Grade Levels 1 - 8 A+LS Reading I - VIII introduces students to a variety of topics including: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
extensive tutorial and instructional narration in grades 1 - 3 phonemic awareness phonics vocabulary development comprehension reading fluency recognition of word families antonyms homophones compound words synonyms phonograms prefixes suffixes root words recognition of main story ideas and details outcome predictions and feelings interpretations conclusions similarities and differences distinguishing fact from make believe and opinion understanding of cause and effect and point of view identification of setting, plot, and characterization instruction of various literary forms
77
Reading I-VIII Grade Levels 1 – 8
The A+LS™ Reading courses are scientific, research-based, integrated courses for grade levels 1-8. This program directs students from beginning reading levels to more advanced reading skills. Reading I, II, and III have tutorial and instructional voice support. A sequence of eight titles provides an extensive e-learning solution ideal for schools that want to use technology to improve their instructional process.
•
Reading is presented as a collection of year-long courses.
•
All lessons contain a study guide, a practice and mastery test, and an essay or constructed response.
•
Lessons include a variety of essay types such as descriptive, persuasive, expository, and letter writing.
•
These courses are certified by MetaMetrics® with a Lexile® score.
•
The A+LS program consists of an Internet-based instructional management system with student assessment tools built in, and educators can test students on national, state, district, or local objectives because any set of standards can be added to the system.
78
Reading I-VIII Grade Levels 1 – 8
•
A+® VIP Bundle customers receive access to Encyclopædia Britannica® Online School Edition (EB) workspaces which contain learning materials. Learning materials may contain articles, games, images, maps, and/or videos. Clearvue (CV) video clips may be included as well.
•
The content in these courses is designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the National Council of Teachers of English (NCTE) for the Standards of English Language Arts. In addition, it addresses the core reading skills identified by the National Reading Panel: phonemic awareness, phonics, vocabulary development, comprehension, and fluency.
•
Each Reading title consists of four units: Reviews, Word Analysis, Comprehension, and Literary Skills. o
The review lessons introduce and refresh the students’ recall of consonants and vowels and their associated sounds and letter patterns (phonics).
o
The Word Analysis unit gives extensive tutoring and practice recognizing word families, antonyms, homophones, compound words, synonyms, phonograms, prefixes, suffixes, and root words (phonics & phonemic awareness).
o
The Comprehension unit focuses on skills that teach the student to recognize main ideas and details, predict outcomes and interpret feelings, draw conclusions, recognize similarity and difference, distinguish fact from make believe and opinion, understand cause and effect and point of view, use context clues to understand the meaning of words, and to find information from charts, graphs, and diagrams.
o
The Literary Skills unit provides discussion and identification of story elements (including setting, plot, characterization) and instruction of various literary forms. These skills together with extensive practice promote the automaticity of the core skills to promote fluency.
79
Reading I-VIII Grade Levels 1 – 8
•
•
Due to the interactive nature of the A+ VIP Bundle, there are a few specific software requirements: o
EB requires a web browser, the following are recommended: Microsoft Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 or higher Safari® versions 2.0 or higher Note: EB requires cookies enabled.
o
EB interactive activities require a web browser equipped with the Adobe® Flash® and Shockwave plug-ins. Available at: www.adobe.com (select Get ADOBE FLASH PLAYER and Get Shockwave Player).
o
EB video clips are offered in Windows Media® and MPEG-4 formats. You’ll need to have a media player installed that will support these formats: Quicktime® - available at: www.apple.com/quicktime/download Windows Media® Player - available at: www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/download
Numerous links to the Internet are provided in the A+ VIP Bundle. An Internet connection is not required for completion of this course, but it is required to utilize the EB components of the A+ VIP Bundle.
80
Reading I-VIII Grade Levels 1 – 8
The Reading titles develop skills in practical situations by utilizing a Four-Step Approach: Study Guide, Practice Test, Mastery Test, and Essay modules are used to define the instructional environment. •
The Study Guide module provides a text- and graphics-based delivery of material that is reinforced by pictures and diagrams supported by a wealth of content. Study Guides teach the concepts and skills associated with each lesson. A number of the Study Guide pages have specific, interactive feedback that will assist the student in solving problems or understanding concepts.
•
The Practice Test module allows the student to practice the skills learned in the Study Guide section. The student has instant access to the study material for reference.
•
In the Mastery Test module, the student takes a scored examination, electronically submits the test, and the results are recorded in the A+LS Management System.
•
The Essay module allows the student to compose individual, free-form answers to a wide variety of questions and problems.
The A+ VIP Bundle includes the Encyclopædia Britannica Online School Edition, which has teacher resources and student learning materials. The materials include a wide range of interactive lessons, research projects, animations, and worksheets that support the Reading courses. • •
Reading contains EB workspaces. Each workspace may contain an article, diagram, study guide, video, or interactive media.
81
Reading I-VIII Grade Levels 1 – 8
The Reading courses each contain a variety of lessons and differ in length, grade level, and available features. Listed below are the courses found within the curriculum planning manual.
Number of Lessons
Length of Course in Semesters
Grade Levels
Lexile Measure
Reading I
43
2
1
Yes
Reading II
45
2
2
Yes
Reading III
43
2
3
Yes
Reading IV
43
2
4
Yes
Reading V
45
2
5
Yes
Reading VI
48
2
6
Yes
Reading VII
40
2
7
Yes
Reading VIII
42
2
8
Yes
Course Name
82
Reading I Grade Level 1
1 2
Lesson Title Capital Letter Review Lower Case Letter Review
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Identify the letters of the alphabet in upper case (Review)
Essay: Written Activity
Identify the letters of the alphabet in lower case (Review)
Essay: Written Activity
Identify initial and single consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, medial consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, blends and digraphs Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences and correctly read 3-4 letter words, long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences Recall a three part pattern from memory; students identify vowel-consonant patterns such as CVC, CVCV, CVVCV, etc. Tell whether pictures, letters or shapes are alike or different, classifying information; students classify various groups of items (Review) Word Analysis Changing the first or last letters to form word families Definition and examples of antonyms; students practice finding antonyms for words Definition and examples of homophones; students learn that words can sound alike but have different meanings Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound words Definition and examples of synonyms; students practice finding a synonym for words
3
Consonant Review
4
Vowel Review
5
Patterns
6
Classifying
7
Word Families
8
Antonyms
9
Homophones
10
Compound Words
11
Synonyms
12
Phonograms
Definition and examples of phonograms; students practice finding phonograms
13 14 15 16
Prefixes Suffixes Syllables Root Words
Correct use of prefixes including the prefix /ur/ Correct use of the suffixes /s/, /es/, /ies/, /ing/, /ed/, etc. Divide words into syllables, count the number of syllables in a word Root words without spelling changes, root words with spelling changes
17
Introducing Nouns
Students learn the definition of nouns and to find nouns in sentences
18
Introducing Verbs
19
Plurals
Students learn the definition of verbs and to locate verbs in sentences Students learn that plural means more than one; students learn how some plurals are formed
83
Essay: Written Activity Essay: Illustration Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity/ Illustration Essay: Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity/ Illustration Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity/ Illustration
Reading I Grade Level 1 Lesson Title 20
Predicting Outcomes
21
Recognizing Main Ideas
22
Interpreting Feelings
23 24
Drawing Conclusions Story Details Similarity & Difference Fact and Make Believe
25 26 27
Make-Believe Stories
28
Understanding Setting
29
Cause and Effect
30
Sorting Information
31
Figurative Language
32
Purpose in Writing
33
Context Clues
34 35
Sequence Point of View
36
Summarizing
37 38 39
Phrasing Structural Analysis Multiple Meanings Spatial-Position Words Charts and Graphs
40 41
Lesson Content Tell what will happen next in a story; students recognize that certain actions might result in certain outcomes Comprehension Identify main idea and details, recognize the title as a source of the main idea, determine the key words and topic sentence Make an inference based on characters and character traits, make an inference based on feelings Make an inference based on drawing conclusions Listen for details in stories, recall details from stories
Essay: Written Activity
Students learn to identify similarities and differences in stories
Essay: Illustration
Students learn to differentiate between fact and make believe
Essay: Written Activity/ Compare & Contrast
Students invent stories that are not real; learn how to distinguish between what is real and what is not real or true
Essay: Illustration
Definition and example of setting; how setting is part of a story
Essay: Written Activity/ Illustration
Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by reading clues Students compare elements of stories Understand figurative language used in stories and poetry, identify types of animals personified in a story personification Distinguish the author’s purpose Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using context clues, use picture clues and syntax to identify word and sentence meaning The concept of sequencing, students determine the sequence of sentences Determine who is telling the story Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points to be included in a summary Moves from word by word reading to phrasing words together Use structural analysis to determine the meaning of unknown words Understand multiple meanings of words Differentiate which picture shows the correct spatial relationship (in, on, beside, above, below, next to, between, about, against Gain information from charts, graphs and diagrams to answer questions
84
Essays & Media Essay: Illustration
Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Activity/ Illustration Essay: Written Activity Essay: Vocabulary in Context Essay: Written Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Activity
Reading I Grade Level 1 Lesson Title 42
Five “W” Questions
43
Poetry
Lesson Content Literary Skills Answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in complete sentences Reading and understanding different types of poetry, recognizing and using sound words (onomatopoeia)
85
Essays & Media Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Reading II Grade Level 2 Lesson Title 1
Consonant Quick Review
2
Vowels Quick Review
3
Verbs Quick Review
4
Plurals Quick Review
6
Pronunciation & Syllables Sight Vocabulary
7
Root Words
8 9
Prefixes Suffixes
10
Context Clues
11
Compound Words
12
Synonyms
13
Antonyms
14
Abbreviations
15
Core Subject Words
16
Homophones
17
Contractions
18
Word Families
19
Analogies
5
Lesson Content Identify initial and single consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, medial consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, blends and digraphs Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences and correctly read 3-4 letter words, long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences Definition and examples of tense; students identify verbs in past, present, and future tenses Review of correctly adding plurals to words Word Analysis Students use phonetic clues and diacritical marks to identify word pronunciation and number of syllables Students learn various sight words and their definitions Definition and examples of root words; introduction to prefixes and suffixes and how each can change the meaning of a root word Correct use of the prefixes /re/ and /un/ (not) Correct use of the suffixes /er/, /or/, /less/, /ing/, etc. Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using context clues, use structural analysis to determine the meaning of unknown words Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound words Definition and examples of synonyms; students practice finding a synonym for words Definition and examples of antonyms; students practice finding antonyms for words Correctly use the abbreviations Mrs., Mr., days of the week and months of the year Identify and use words from language arts, math, social studies and science Definition and examples of homophones; students identify homophones in sentences Definition and examples of contractions; students identify words that form contractions Changing the first or last letters to form word families The definition of analogies, examples of analogies using synonyms, antonyms, and parts of a whole; students practice completing analogies
86
Essays & Media Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Reading II Grade Level 2 Lesson Title 20
Homographs
21
Multiple Meanings
22
Sequencing
24 25 26
Main Idea and Details Alphabetization Information Fact and Opinion
27
Cause and Effect
28
Classifying Compare and Contrast
23
29 30
Characterization
31 32
Feelings Predicting Outcomes
33
Generalizations
34
Summarizing and Paraphrasing
35
Drawing Conclusions
36
Common Expressions
37
Five “W” Questions
38
Story Elements
Lesson Content Definition and examples of homographs; students identify homographs in sentences Understand multiple meanings of words, recognize the multiple meanings of words Definition and examples of sequence and order of events; students put events in order; sequence a series of pictures Comprehension Identify main idea and details, recognize the title as a source of the main idea, determine the key words and topic sentence Students practice alphabetizing using first, second, and third letters of words Gain information from pictures, charts and diagrams Students identify facts and opinions Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by reading clues Definition of classifying; students classify various groups of items Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events, characters, etc. Make an inference based on characters and character traits; definition of traits; students use character traits to predict outcomes Make an inference based on feelings Students read clues and decide what could happen next in a story The process of going from a specific account to general statements; true and false generalizations Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points to be included in a summary; definition and examples of paraphrasing Make an inference based on drawing conclusions, identify information which gives support for opinions Everyday sayings and proverbs and their meanings Students answer who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading selection Literary Skills Use major elements of story structure (beginning-middle-end, character, setting, plot) to discuss literature and write a story
87
Essays & Media Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Illustration
Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Bar Graph Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Reading II Grade Level 2 Lesson Title 39
Purpose in Writing
40
Point of View
42
Fiction and Nonfiction Folktales and Fables
43
Reality and Fantasy
44
Literary Forms
45
Personal Narratives
41
Lesson Content Identification of various purposes for writing, including informing, persuading, creative writing, describing; students distinguish the author’s purpose Definition and examples of first and third person points of view; students determine who is telling a story Definition and examples of fiction and nonfiction; students identify titles of books that are either fiction or nonfiction Definition and examples of tall tales, folktales and fables Definition of fantasy, recognizing the difference between reality and fantasy, distinguish between real and make-believe Definition and examples of poetry, short stories, autobiographies, and biographies Definition and examples of personal narratives; students identify words that are used in writing personal experiences
88
Essays & Media Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Reading III Grade Level 3 Lesson Title 1
Consonant Review
2
Vowel Review
3
Verbs Review
4
Plurals Review
5
Syllables
6
Sight Vocabulary
7
Prefixes and Suffixes
8
Context Clues
9
Compound Words Synonyms and Antonyms Core Subject Words
10 11 12
Homophones and Homographs
13
Contractions
14
Word Families
15
Abbreviations
16
Pronunciation
17
Connotation & Denotation
Lesson Content Identify initial and single consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, medial consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, blends and digraphs Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences and correctly read 3-4 letter words, long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences Identify verbs in sentences, forms of regular verbs, verb forms (past, present, future) Review of correctly adding plurals to words Word Analysis Students learn guidelines for dividing words into syllables, use phonetic clues and diacritical marks to identify word pronunciation Develop a sight vocabulary of high frequency words Correct use of the prefixes /re/, /un/ (not), /dis/ (not), /un/ (opposite), /dis/, (opposite) etc., correct use of the suffixes /er/, /or/, /less/, /ly/, /ing/, etc., Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using context clues and inferences, use structural analysis to determine the meaning of unknown words; students search for clues to word meanings in pictures, surrounding words, and in the dictionary Definition and examples of compound word; students identify compound words Definition and examples of synonyms and antonyms; students practice finding a synonym or antonym for words Identify and use words from language arts, math, social studies and science Definition and examples of homographs; students identify homographs in sentences, definition and examples of homophones; students identify homophones in sentences Identify words that form compound words Changing the first or last letters to form word families, use letter sounds association and sounds to spell words, use context clues to decode words Correctly use the abbreviations Mrs., Mr., days of the week and months or the year Read stories pronouncing words accurately, moves from word by word reading to phrasing words together, use phonetic clues and diacritical marks to identify word pronunciation Recognize the definition of a word in a sentence, recognize the exact definition of a word in a sentence
89
Essays & Media Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Reading III Grade Level 3
18 19
Lesson Title Alphabetizing Sequencing & Classifying
20
Main Ideas
21
Story Details
22
Information
23
Fact and Opinion
24
Cause and Effect
25
Compare and Contrast
26
Feelings and Motives
27
Predicting Outcomes
28
Generalizations
29
Summarizing and Paraphrasing
30
Drawing Conclusions
31
Point of View
32
Five “W” Questions
33
Story Elements & Setting
34
Purpose in Writing
35
Fiction and Nonfiction
36
Folktales and Fables
Lesson Content Students learn to alphabetize to the third letter of a word Sequence a series of pictures; definition and examples of sequence; importance of word order in a story; words that indicate sequence Identify main idea and details, recognize the title as a source of the main idea, determine the key words and topic sentence Definition and examples of details; students recall details from stories Introduces students to tables, charts, and diagrams; students gain information from pictures, charts and diagrams Definitions and examples of facts and opinions; how propaganda is used to influence opinions; learning the difference between fact and opinion Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by reading clues Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events, characters, etc. Make an inference based on feelings and motives; make an inference based on characters and character traits Students read clues and decide what could happen next in a story Definition and examples of generalizations; the process of going from a specific account to general statements Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points to be included in a summary, students will retell a story in their own words Make an inference based on drawing conclusions, identify information that gives support for opinions Definition and examples of first and third person points of view Answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading selection Definition and examples of setting, the elements of time and setting; the importance of setting to a story Students understand that there are many purposes in writing; writing is for a specific purpose; students identify Definition and examples of realistic fiction and science fiction, understand elements of nonfiction Definition and examples of tall tales, folktales and fables, legends; elements of each
90
Essays & Media Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Illustration Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity/ Illustration Essay: Written Activity
Reading III Grade Level 3 Lesson Title 37
Reality and Fantasy
38 39
Literary Forms 1 Literary Forms 2 Narrative and Expository Figurative Language 1 Figurative Language 2 Figurative Language 3
40 41 42 43
Lesson Content Definition of fantasy, recognizing the difference between reality and fantasy, distinguish between real and make-believe Elements of a short story described, including plot, characters, and setting Autobiography, biography, understand the purpose and form of a biography Identify narrative materials and expository materials Definition and example of metaphors, similes, and personification; students identify figurative language in speech Definition and examples of alliteration, hyperbole, and onomatopoeia; students identify figurative language in sentences Definition and examples of lyric poetry, students identify words that rhyme
91
Essays & Media Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Reading IV Grade Level 4 Lesson Title 1
Consonants Quick Review
2
Vowels Quick Review
3
Verbs Quick Review
4
Plurals Quick Review
5
Pronunciation & Syllables
6
Sight Words
7
Root Words
8
Prefixes
9
Suffixes
10
Context Clues
11
Compound Words
12
Synonyms
13
Antonyms
14
Abbreviations
15 16
Core Subject Words Homographs
Lesson Content Identify initial and single consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, medial consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, blends and digraphs Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences, long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences; students identify vowel/consonant patterns Identify subjects and verbs and predicates; action verbs; verb tenses (past, present, future) Identify singular and plural; rules for forming plurals; words that have another word for plural form; words that have the same word for both singular and plural Word Analysis Use phonetic clues and diacritical marks to identify word pronunciation, divide words into syllables Develop a sight vocabulary of high frequency words; definitions of various sight words Root words without spelling changes, root words with spelling changes; adding prefixes and suffixes to root words Correct use of the prefixes /re/, /un/ (not), /dis/ (not), /un/ (opposite), /mis/, (opposite) etc. Correct use of the suffixes /er/, /or/, /less/, /ly/, /ing/, /able/, /ible/, /ment/, etc. Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using context clues, use structural analysis to determine the meaning of unknown words Definition and examples of compound word; students identify compound words Definition and examples of synonyms; using the thesaurus as a source for finding synonyms; students practice finding a synonym for words Definition and examples of antonyms; using the thesaurus as a source for antonyms; students practice finding antonyms for words Correctly use the abbreviations Mrs., Mr., days of the week and months or the year; states Identify and use words from language arts, math, social studies and science Definition of homographs; selecting the correct homograph in sentences
92
Essays & Media Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Reading IV Grade Level 4 Lesson Title 17
Homonyms and Homophones
18
Contractions
19
Analogies
20
Multiple Meanings
21
Main Ideas and Details
22
Information
23
Alphabetization
24
Cause and Effect
25
Fact and Opinion Compare and Contrast
26 27
Characterization
28
Classifying
29 30
Predicting Outcomes Generalizations Summarizing and Paraphrasing
31 32
Drawing Conclusions
33
Common Expressions
34
Five “W” Questions
Lesson Content Definition and examples of homonyms; students identify homonyms in sentences, definition and examples of homophones; students identify homophones in sentences Examples of forming contractions; contractions using not; pronouns and contractions Comprehension The definition of analogies, students practice completing analogies Understand multiple meanings of words, recognize the multiple meanings of words; the importance of context clues in defining words that have multiple meanings Identify main idea and details, recognize the title as a source of the main idea, determine the key words and topic sentence Definition and examples of charts, graphs, and diagrams; students gain information from pictures, charts, graphs, and diagrams
Essays & Media Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Bar Graph Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Activity
Alphabetize to the third letter Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by reading clues; questions that can help determine cause and effect Identify facts and opinions Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events, characters, etc. Definition and examples of characterization and character traits; students make an inference based on characters and character traits Definition of classifying, categorizing, and grouping; tips for helping students classify various groups of items Students read clues and decide what could happen next in a story The process of going from a specific account to general statements Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points to be included in a summary; students practice paraphrasing Make an inference based on conclusions, identify information which gives support for opinions
Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity
Everyday sayings, proverbs, and idioms
Essay: Written Activity
Answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading selection
Essay: Written Activity
93
Reading IV Grade Level 4 Lesson Title 35
Point of View
36
Story Elements
37
Purpose in Writing
38 39
Fiction and Nonfiction Folk Tales and Fables
40
Reality and Fantasy
41
Literary Forms
42 43
Figurative Language 1 Figurative Language 2
Lesson Content Literary Skills Determine who is telling the story; examples of first and third person points of view Use major elements of story structure (beginning-middle-end, character, setting, plot) to discuss literature and write a story Writing to describe, entertain, inform (including autobiographies and biographies), and to persuade Definition and examples of realistic fiction; historic fiction, and science fiction; nonfiction Definition and examples of tall tales, folktales and fables; exaggeration Definition of fantasy, recognizing the difference between reality and fantasy, distinguish between real and make-believe Short stories; autobiography, biography, understand the purpose and form of a biography; poetry, understand figurative language used in stories and poetry
Essays & Media Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Activity Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Activity Essay: Written Activity Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Activity
Metaphors, similes and personification
Essay: Written Activity
Definition and examples of hyperbole, alliteration, onomatopoeia
Essay: Written Activity
94
Reading V Grade Level 5 Lesson Title 1
Consonants
2
Vowels
3
Verbs and Contractions
4
Plurals
5
Suffixes
6
Prefixes
7
Compound Words
9
Synonyms and Antonyms Analogies
10
Multiple Meanings
11
Abbreviations
12
Root Words
13
Pronunciation/Syllab les
14
Predicting/ Conclusions
15
Alphabetization
16
Information
17
Fact and Opinion
8
Lesson Content Identify initial and single consonant sounds, and sound-letter correspondences; final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences; medial consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences; blends and digraphs Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences; long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences Identify verbs in sentences; forms of regular verbs; verb forms: past, present, and future; identify compound words that become contractions Review of rules to form plural words; changing words for plural form; words that do not change from singular to plural Word Analysis Correct use of the suffixes -er, -or-, -less-, -ly-, -ing, etc. Correct use of the prefixes re-, un- (not), dis- (not), un- (opposite), dis-, (opposite) etc. Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound words; open and closed compounds Definition and examples of synonyms and antonyms; students practice finding a synonym and antonym for various words Definition of analogies; students practice completing analogies Definition and examples of homonyms, homophones, and homographs; students identify and use homonyms, homophones, and homographs in sentences; recognize the multiple meanings of words Correctly use the abbreviations Mrs. and Mr.; days of the week and months of the year Root words without spelling changes; root words with spelling changes; changing the first or last letters to form word families Read stories pronouncing words accurately; use phonetic clues and diacritical marks to identify word pronunciation; dividing words into syllables Students read clues and decide what could happen next in a story; make an inference based on conclusions; identify information which gives support for opinions Alphabetize to the third letter Gain information from pictures, charts, and diagrams; line and bar graphs Comprehension Identify facts and opinions; idioms and sense words
95
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Illustration
Reading V Grade Level 5
18 19
Lesson Title Compare and Contrast Sequencing/ Classifying
20
Main Ideas
21
Connotation & Denotation
22
Cause and Effect
23 24
Context Clues 1 Context Clues 2
25
Narratives
26
28
Characterization Common Expressions Generalizations
29
Summarizing
30
Five “W” Questions
31
Story Elements
32
Purpose in Writing
33
Prior Knowledge
34
Setting
35
Fiction
36
Nonfiction
27
Lesson Content Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events, characters, etc. Sequencing information from a variety of sources; definition of classifying; students classify various groups of items Identify main idea and details; recognize the title as a source of the main idea; determine the key words and topic sentence Recognize the definition of a word in a sentence; recognize the exact definition of a word in a sentence using context clues Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by reading clues Identify word meanings through context clues and inferences Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using context clues Recall details from narratives; story elements including setting, characters, and resolution Make an inference based on characters and character traits
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Illustration Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Essay: Activity
Everyday sayings, proverbs, and common abbreviations
Essay: Written Response
The process of going from a specific account to general statements Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points to be included in a summary Answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading selection Use major elements of story structure: beginning-middle-end, character, setting, and plot to discuss literature and write a story; conflict and resolution Distinguish the author’s purpose in writing to inform, persuade, or entertain; identify point of view Using prior knowledge to understand the problems and feelings of characters in stories, and the importance of historical events Definition and examples of historical fiction; understanding the elements of time and setting
Essay: Written Response
Definition and examples of realistic fiction and science fiction Understand elements of nonfiction; identify source of nonfictional writing including: encyclopedias, atlases, etc.
96
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Essay: Written Response Essay: Written response Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Research
Reading V Grade Level 5 Lesson Title
Lesson Content
37
Folktales and Fables
Definition and examples of tall tales, folktales, and fables
38
Reality and Fantasy
39
Literary Forms 1
40
Literary Forms 2
Short stories; problems in resolution; characters and setting
41
Literary Forms 3
Autobiography; biography; understand the purpose and form of a biography
42
Figurative Language
Understand figurative language used in stories and poetry; using hyperbole, alliteration, and onomatopoeia
43
Narrative & Expository
44
Propaganda and Bias
45
High Frequency Words
Definition of fantasy; recognizing the difference between reality and fantasy; distinguishing between real and make-believe Literary Skills Understand figurative language used in stories, poetry, metaphors, similes, personification, hyperbole, alliteration, and onomatopoeia
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Illustration Essay: Narrative
Identify propaganda and bias including: techniques of omission of facts, bandwagon, over-generalization, and testimonials
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response
Identify high frequency words and core subject words
Essay: Activity
Identify narrative materials and expository writing
97
Reading VI Grade Level 6 Lesson Title 1
Consonant Review
2
Vowel Review
3
Verb Review
4
Pronunciation
5
Sight Words
6
Common Misspellings
7
Root Words
8
Prefixes
9
Suffixes
10
Greek and Latin Words
11
Context Clues
12
Compound Words
13 14 15
Synonyms Antonyms Homonyms
16
Homographs and Homophones
17
Contractions
Lesson Content Identify initial and single consonant sounds, and sound-letter correspondences; final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences; medial consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences; blends and digraphs Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences; long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences Identify verbs in sentences; forms of regular verbs; verb forms: past, present, and future; vowel pairs and vowel digraphs Review of pronunciation skills; long and short vowels; pronunciation symbols Word Analysis Develop a sight vocabulary of high frequency words Review of words that have tricky spellings and words that are confused with others and commonly misused; also includes some words that change spelling to form plurals Root words without spelling changes; root words with spelling changes; prefixes and suffixes Correctly use the prefixes pre-, en-, non-, mis-, non-, in- and im-, dis-, anti-, sub-, re-, etc. Correctly use the suffixes -ible, -able, -ful, -ment, -y, -ly, and -ily, -ance, -tion, and –ment Examples and definitions of words with Greek and Latin derivatives; old English words; middle and modern English words Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using pictures or familiar words context clues; use structural analysis to determine the meaning of unknown words; search for further information Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound words Definition of synonyms; students practice finding synonyms for words Definition of antonyms; students practice finding antonyms for words Definition of homonyms; selecting the correct homonym in sentences Definition, examples of, and use of homophones and homographs; correctly use the homophones: here/hear; to/too/two; its/it’s; your/you’re; they’re/there/their, etc.; words with multiple meanings Forming contractions; using negative words with contractions; identify words that form compound words; how to avoid confusing compound words and contractions
98
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Reading VI Grade Level 6 Lesson Title 18
Sound Associations
19
Analogies
20
Abbreviations
21
Core Subject Words
23
Multiple Meaning Words Sequencing
24
Alphabetization
22
25
Main Ideas
26
Fact and Opinion
27
Conflict and Climax
28
Cause and Effect
29
Compare and Contrast
30
Characterization
31
Predicting and Summarizing
32
Drawing Conclusions
33
Five “W” Questions
Lesson Content Sounds that are associated with various letters and letter combinations; digraphs; letters that have more than one sound Definition and examples of analogies; includes examples of analogies as they often appear on standardized tests Identify and correctly use abbreviations; measurement abbreviations and business abbreviations Identify and use words from: language arts, math, social studies, science, art, drama, and technology,
Essays & Media Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Diagram Essay: Illustration
Understand multiple meanings of words; define connotation and denotation
Essay: Written Response
Importance of sequence in telling a story; words that identify sequence
Essay: Illustration Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Activity
Alphabetize to the third letter Comprehension Identify main idea and details; recognize the title as a source of the main idea; determine the key words and topic sentence; recall details from stories Identify facts and opinions, idioms, and sense words; choose significant details which do or do not support the main idea; identify information which gives support for opinions Understand conflict, climax, comparisons, and resolution in selections Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by reading clues; classifying various groups of items; explicit and implicit cause and effect; words that signal cause or effect Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events, characters, etc. Make an inference based on characters and character traits; identify various personality types Review of cause and effect; read and predict outcomes based on knowledge gained in reading; summarizing Explanation of how word clues about main ideas and details of stories can help the student reach a conclusion; examination and discussion of evidence that helps support conclusions Answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading selection
99
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Illustration Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Reading VI Grade Level 6 Lesson Title 34
Story Elements
35
Purpose in Writing
36
Paraphrasing
37
Point of View
38 39
Novels and Short Stories Realistic/Science Fiction
40
Mysteries
41
Propaganda and Bias
42
Folklore
43
Nonfiction
44
Poetry
Lesson Content Use major elements of story structure: beginning-middle-end, character, setting, and plot to discuss literature and write a story; mood Distinguish the author’s purpose: the KWL technique; writing for entertainment and for information; audience Students will retell a story in their own words; generalizations; tips for paraphrasing Recognizing point of view; first person, second person, third person, and narrator; omniscience Identify the elements of a short stories and novels; plot; characters; conflict Understand elements of nonfiction; definition and examples of historical fiction; understanding the elements of time and setting Definition and elements of a mystery; clues in mysteries; skills for understanding mysteries Identification of propaganda techniques; bandwagon, testimonials, faulty cause, and loaded words The elements of folktales, fables, and tall tales Identify biographies and autobiographies; essay and journals Use of poetry, ballad, sonnet, lyric, narrative, and limerick
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Activity Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Journal Writing Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response
Literary Skills 45
Drama
Use of elements of drama: tragedy and comedy
46
Mood and Tone
The elements of mood and tone in reading selections; clues for recognizing mood and tone
47
Metaphors and Similes
Identification of metaphors and similes in reading selections
48
Figurative Language
Identify and correctly use alliteration and onomatopoeia; personification and hyperbole
100
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Activity
Reading VII Grade Level 7 Lesson Title 1
Verbs Quick Review
2
Consonants Quick Review
3
Vowels Quick Review
4
Pronunciation
5
Root Words
6
Prefixes and Suffixes Greek and Latin Words
7 8
Context Clues
10
Connotation & Denotation Multiple Meanings
11
Compound Words
12
Contractions
9
13 14 15
Common Misspellings Abbreviations Synonyms and Antonyms
16
Word Similarities
17
Alphabetization
Lesson Content Identify verbs in sentences; forms of regular verbs; verb forms: past, present, and future; active and passive voices Identify initial and single consonant sounds, and sound-letter correspondences; final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences; medial consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences; blends and digraphs Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences, and correctly read 3-4 letter words; long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences; vowel combinations Word Analysis Use phonetic clues and diacritical marks to identify word pronunciation Root words without spelling changes; root words with spelling changes; Latin and Greek root words; prefixes and suffixes The use of prefixes; affixes and suffixes with root words Examples and definitions of words with Greek and Latin derivatives Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using pictures or familiar words context clues; use structural analysis to determine the meaning of unknown words Recognize the definition of a word in a sentence; recognize the exact definition of a word in a sentence; positive and negative connotations Recognize and understand the multiple meanings of words Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound words; separated and hyphenated compound words The formation of contractions; identifying differences among plural, possessive, and contraction Understanding changes with plurals; verbs; vowel sounds; dropping final ‘e’; doubling rule; changing ‘y’ to ‘i’ Identify and correctly use abbreviations Definition of synonyms and antonyms; practice finding synonyms and antonyms for words; definition of antonyms Changing the first or last letters to form word families, use letter sounds association and sounds to spell words Alphabetize to the third letter; using guide words; how to alphabetize short and long words
101
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Letter writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response
Reading VII Grade Level 7 Lesson Title 18 19 20 21
Main Ideas and Details Sequencing and Outcomes Classifying Information Compare and Contrast
22
Summarizing and Paraphrasing
23
Fact and Opinion
24
Propaganda and Bias
25
Cause and Effect
26
Common Expressions
27
Purpose in Writing
28
Point of View
29
Fiction
30
Elements of Fiction
Lesson Content Comprehension Identify main idea and details; recognize the title as a source of the main idea; determine the key words and topic sentence Put in order of sequence; students read clues and decide what could happen next in a story; chronological order and spatial order Definition of classifying; students classify various groups of items; finding general to specific order; sub-groups Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events, characters, etc.; transitions Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points to be included in a summary; the process of going from a specific account to general statements; paraphrasing; avoiding plagiarism Identify facts and opinions, idioms, and sense words; choose significant details which do or do not support the main idea; identify information which gives support for opinions; verifying facts
Essays & Media Essay: Expository writing Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Compare and Contrast writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Expository writing
Identify propaganda and bias; bandwagon; testimonials
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response
Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by reading clues; short and long term effects
Essay: Expository writing
Everyday sayings, proverbs, and common abbreviations
Essay: Written Response
Distinguish the author’s purpose; narrative, descriptive, expository, and persuasive writing Recognizing points of view; first person, second person, third person, and narrator Understand elements of nonfiction; definition and examples of historical fiction; understanding the elements of time and setting Use major elements of story structure; exciting force; rising and falling action; complications
Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material CV Videos Essay: Written Response
Literary Skills 31
Literary Terms
32
Fables and Folktales
Identify the elements of flashback and foreshadowing; mood and tone Definition and examples of fables, folktales, and tall tales; fantasy
102
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Writer's Choice Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative Writing
Reading VII Grade Level 7 Lesson Title 33
Nonfiction
34
Newspaper Writing
35
Poetry
36
Plays
39
Figurative Language 1 Figurative Language 2 Analogies
40
Special Vocabulary
37 38
Lesson Content Understand elements of nonfiction; essay; autobiography and biography; narratives Identify the important elements in newspaper articles; lead sentences; topic sentences; concluding sentences; using the inverted pyramid to answer five “W” questions Poetry; ballad; sonnet; free verse; imagery in poetry; lyric poetry Identify the elements of a drama: tragedy and comedy; script; stage directions; playwrights; tragic hero; tragic flaw; melodrama Identifying and correctly using metaphors and similes Identifying and correctly using similes, hyperbole, and personification; alliteration, onomatopoeia, oxymorons, and contradictions Examples of analogies; relationships of words; logic Words common to math, science, government, transportation, other languages, weather, space, business, theatre, and ecology
103
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative Writing Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative Writing Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Reading VIII Grade Level 8
1
Lesson Title Consonants Quick Review
2
Verbs Quick Review
3
Sight Vocabulary
5
Common Misspellings Root Words
6
Prefixes
7
Suffixes
8
Greek and Latin Words
9
Compound Words
10
Synonyms
11
Antonyms
12
Homophones
13
Word Similarities
14
Contractions
15
Word Families
16
Analogies
17
Connotation & Denotation
18
Multiple Meanings
19
Alphabetization
4
Lesson Content Students identify consonant-vowel patterns that help determine pronunciation; letters with two sounds; blends, digraphs, and diphthongs Identify the principle parts of verbs; action and state of being verbs; tenses; participles Word Analysis High frequency words that students recognize on sight Understanding changes with plurals; verbs; vowel sounds; rules for spelling tricky words; exceptions to spelling rules Root words without spelling changes; root words with spelling changes Correctly use the prefixes pre-, en-, non-, mis-, non-, in- and im-, dis-, anti-, sub-, re-, etc.; meanings of prefixes Definition and examples of suffixes; meaning of various suffixes; correct use of the suffixes -ible, -able, -ful, -ment, -y, -ly and -ily
Essays & Media Essay: Activity Essay: Narrative Writing Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity
Examples and definitions of root words with Greek and Latin derivatives Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound words Definition of synonyms; students practice finding synonyms for words; using the thesaurus as a source for synonyms Definition and examples of antonyms; students identify antonyms in sentences Definition of homophones; looking for clues in a sentence that indicate which homophone should be used Review of homographs; using context to determine meaning and word pronunciation Contractions by verb groups: has, will, us, are, would, and have; negative contractions Changing the first letter or letters to form word families Discovering the commonality that creates an analogy; analogies on standardized tests Recognize the definition of a word in a sentence; recognize the exact definition of a word in a sentence; make an inference based on feelings and motives Increasing reading comprehension by understanding words with multiple meanings; using context clues to determine word meaning Tips for alphabetizing; alphabetizing abbreviations
104
Essay: Illustration Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Expository Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Reading VIII Grade Level 8 Lesson Title 20
Core Subject Words
21
Order and Sequence
22
Main Ideas and Details
23
Fact and Opinion
24
Cause and Effect
27
Compare and Contrast Classifying Information Characterization
28
Summarizing
29
Predicting Outcomes
30
Common Expressions
31
Newspaper Writing
25 26
32
Elements of Fiction
33
Purpose in Writing
Lesson Content Definition and examples of core subject words, including: math, science, language arts, computer, social studies, art, and drama Students determine order of events; students read clues and decide what could happen next in a story Identify main idea and details; recognize the title as a source of the main idea; determine the key words and topic sentence; the position of the topic sentence in a paragraph Identify facts and opinions, idioms, and sense words; choose significant details which do or do not support the main idea; identify information which gives support for opinions; verifying facts Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by reading clues; short and long term effects Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events, characters, etc.; the thesis statement; similarities and differences
Essays & Media Essay: Research Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Descriptive Writing Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response
Definition of classifying; students classify various groups of items
Essay: Written Response
Identifying clues about character traits Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points to be included in a summary; the process of going from a specific account to general statements; students will retell a story in their own words; paraphrasing; avoiding plagiarism; generalizations Make an inference based on drawing conclusions; logic and character’s actions in making inferences Everyday humorous sayings, proverbs, and common abbreviations; using euphemisms in informal language Elements of newspaper reporting; answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading; identify propaganda and bias; headlines, bylines, and datelines; propaganda techniques including: loaded words, transfer, and unreliable testimonials Categories of fiction; elements of fiction including: rising action, climax, falling action, resolution, characters, setting, and theme; historical science and realistic fiction
Essay: Narrative Writing
Distinguish the author’s purpose; writing for a specific or a general purpose
105
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Illustrations Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material CV Videos Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response
Reading VIII Grade Level 8 Lesson Title 34
Nonfiction
35
Point of View
36
Folklore
37
Poetry 1
38
Poetry 2
39
Plays
40
Literary Devices
41
Figurative Language
42
Figure of Speech Review
Lesson Content Identify elements of nonfictional writing; biography, autobiography, essay, newspaper, and historical accounts Recognizing point of view; first person, second person, third person, and narrator; understand elements of nonfiction; third person omniscient narrator and third person limited narrator Literary Skills Definition and examples of fables, folktales, and tall tales; tricksters; symbols Poetry; ballad; sonnet; lyric; narrative; limerick; free verse; identify the elements of a farce and satire; irony and parody; oxymorons; rhythm patterns in poetry Characteristics of narrative poetry; heroic adventures; importance of rhyming in narrative poetry Identify the elements of a drama, tragedy, and comedy; scenes and acts Identify elements of mood and tone; identify flashback as a literary tool; identify foreshadowing and imagery as literary tools; mood and tone Identifying and correctly using metaphors and similes; identifying and correctly using similes, hyperbole, and personification; using alliteration and onomatopoeia Review of overstatement and understatement; analogy; irony, hyperbole, personification, clichés, euphemisms, and doublespeak
106
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity
Essay: Narrative Writing Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative Writing Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Letter writing Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Written Response Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Activity Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Activity
English Literature IX - XII Grade Levels 9 - 12 A+LS English Literature IX - XII introduces students to the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • •
reading of a broad range of classic works of literature novels plays short stories understanding and appreciation of literary works structured study of the human condition exploration of the universal themes of literature application of literature to life today literary terms, devices, and forms comprehension through concrete questions comprehension through higher-order thinking skills comprehension through synthesizing learning into new ideas and concepts use of study aids
107
Literature and English Skills Grade Levels IX - XII
The A+LS™ Literature and English Skills courses are an integrated series of titles for grade levels 9-12. Combining instruction in the areas of Reading, Vocabulary, and Language Usage, the English Skills courseware provides a complete High School English course when coupled with the companion Literature titles. The A+LS Literature courses are composed of four titles that represent a guided study of a broad range of classic works of literature. The complete text of each of these classic works is presented within the lesson. Each lesson provides an introduction to the chapters that will be read and provides interactive study aids similar to a reference library in a classroom.
•
Literature and English Skills is presented as a collection of year-long courses.
•
All lessons contain a study guide, a practice test, and mastery test. Most lessons have an essay or constructed response.
•
Lessons include a variety of essay types such as descriptive, persuasive, expository, and letter writing. Students will also complete a self-evaluation form to assess their performance.
•
These courses are certified by MetaMetrics® with a Lexile® score.
108
Literature and English Skills Grade Levels IX - XII
•
A+® VIP Bundle customers receive access to Encyclopædia Britannica® Online School Edition (EB) workspaces which contain learning materials. Learning materials may contain articles, games, images, maps, and/or videos. Clearvue (CV) video clips may be included as well.
•
The content in these courses is designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the National Council of Teachers of English (NCTE) for the Standards of English Language Arts.
•
The Literature lessons provide a broad exposure to literature, enabling the student to acquire the necessary skills to understand and appreciate literature for a lifetime.
•
Students will study the human condition through the exploration of the universal themes of literature, literary terms, devices and forms, and their application to life.
•
The Usage component of both the Literature and English Skills titles offers extensive focus on the convention of writing which includes parts of speech, proper sentence structure, and sentence diagramming.
•
Students are taught to identify grammar pitfalls that include subject/verb disagreement, tense shifts, double negatives, fragments and run-on sentences, parallelism, and misused words. Sentence mechanics are addressed in each course. Lessons also provide instruction on capitalization and punctuation.
109
Literature and English Skills Grade Levels IX - XII
Due to the interactive nature of the A+ VIP Bundle, there are a few specific software requirements:
•
o
EB requires a web browser, the following are recommended: Microsoft Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 or higher Safari® versions 2.0 or higher Note: EB requires cookies enabled.
o
EB interactive activities require a web browser equipped with the Adobe® Flash® and Shockwave plug-ins. Available at: www.adobe.com (select Get ADOBE FLASH PLAYER and Get Shockwave Player).
o
EB video clips are offered in Windows Media® and MPEG-4 formats. You’ll need to have a media player installed that will support these formats: Quicktime® - available at: www.apple.com/quicktime/download Windows Media® Player - available at: www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/download
Numerous links to the Internet are provided in the A+ VIP Bundle. An Internet connection is not required for completion of this course, but it is required to utilize the EB components of the A+ VIP Bundle.
110
Literature and English Skills Grade Levels IX - XII
A Four-Step Approach: Study Guide, Practice Test, Mastery Test, and Essay, defines the instructional environment. •
The Study Guide module provides a text- and graphics-based delivery of material that is reinforced by pictures and diagrams supported by a wealth of content. Study Guides teach the concepts and skills associated with each lesson. A number of the Study Guide pages have specific, interactive feedback that will assist students in solving problems or understanding concepts.
•
The Practice Test module allows students to practice the skills learned in the Study Guide section. The student has instant access to the study material for reference.
•
In the Mastery Test module, the student takes a scored examination and then electronically submits the test. The results are recorded in the A+LS Management System.
•
The Essay module allows the student to compose individual, free-form answers to a wide variety of questions and problems.
The A+ VIP Bundle includes Encyclopædia Britannica Online School Edition, which has teacher resources and student learning materials. The materials include a wide range of interactive lessons, research projects, animations, and worksheets that support the Literature and English Skills courses. • •
Literature and English Skills contains EB workspaces. Each workspace may contain an article, diagram, study guide, video, or interactive media.
111
Literature and English Skills Grade Levels IX - XII
The Literature and English Skills courses each contain a variety of lessons and differ in length, grade level, and available features. Listed below are the courses found within the curriculum planning manual.
Number of Lessons
Length of Course in Semesters
Grade Levels
Lexile Measure
English Literature IX
42
2
9
Yes
English Literature X
56
2
10
Yes
English Literature XI
52
2
11
Yes
English Literature XII
33
2
12
Yes
English Skills IX
40
2
9
Yes
English Skills X
38
2
10
Yes
English Skills XI
36
2
11
Yes
English Skills XII
34
2
12
Yes
Course Name
112
English Literature IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-2
2
Chapters 3-5
3
Chapters 6-8
4
Chapters 9-10
Introduction 1
Books 1-2
Lesson Content The Strange Case of Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde The Strange Case of Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde is the story of Dr. Jekyll, a respected scientist in nineteenth century London. The theme of good versus evil is used to illustrate the changes in Jekyll's character. Chapter 1 - Story of the Door: Mr. Utterson and his cousin, Mr. Enfield, take their weekly Sunday walk and discuss a man named Edward Hyde who had trampled a young girl in the street. Chapter 2 - Search for Mr. Hyde: Mr. Utterson meets Hyde in the street outside the building and is disappointed to find Dr. Jekyll is not at home. Chapter 3 - Dr. Jekyll Was Quite at Ease: Dr. Jekyll hosts a dinner party at his home for some of his friends, and Utterson expresses his dislike for Hyde. Chapter 4 - The Carew Murder Case: All of London talks about the murder of Sir Danvers Carew, witnessed by a maidservant looking out her window. Chapter 5 - Incident of the Letter: Mr. Utterson discovers some surprising information about Dr. Jekyll in a letter Jekyll asked him to keep. Chapter 6 - Remarkable Incident of Dr. Lanyon: Dr. Jekyll hosts another dinner party at his home; days later, Jekyll and Lanyon become very ill. Chapter 7 - Incident at the Window: Mr. Utterson and Mr. Enfield walk past Dr. Jekyll's house and witness a shocking accident. They quickly leave the scene. Chapter 8 - The Last Night: Dr. Jekyll's butler and Utterson make an astonishing discovery about Jekyll. Chapter 9 - Dr. Lanyon's Narrative: Dr. Lanyon reveals he has received a letter from Dr. Jekyll asking for help. Chapter 10 - Henry Jekyll's Full Statement of the Case: All the mysteries of the story are revealed to the reader and illustrate the duality theme and Jekyll's struggle with Mr. Hyde. The Odyssey Using flashback, Odysseus shares accounts of the obstacles he faces in returning home from the Trojan War. Book 1 – Athene Intervenes: On Mount Olympus, Athene tells Zeus that Odysseus should leave the island of Calypso. Book 2 - Telemachus Is Called into Action: Telemachus calls the people together and begins a search for his father.
113
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
English Literature IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title 2
Books 3-4
3
Books 5-6
4
Books 7-8
5
Books 9-10
6
Books 11-12
7
Books 13-14
8
Books 15-16
Lesson Content Book 3 - Telemachus and Nestor Meet: King Nestor relates a story of the Trojan War and offers to help Telemachus in his search for his father. Book 4 - Telemachus Conferences with Menelaus at Sparta: Telemachus meets with Menelaus who says Odysseus is held captive on the island of Calypso. Book 5 - Calypso Frees Odysseus: Odysseus is attacked by Poseidon, thrown into the sea, and washes up on the shore of Phaecia. Book 6 - The Phaeacians Aid Odysseus: Odysseus finally awakens on the shore of Phaecia and approaches Princess Nausicaa. Book 7 - Odysseus Presents Himself to the King: The king invites Odysseus to a banquet and offers to help Odysseus get safely home. Book 8 - The Hospitality of the Phaeacians: Odysseus takes part in an athletic competition and tells people at a banquet about his adventures since leaving Troy. Book 9 - The Land of the Cyclops: Odysseus describes the Lotus Eaters and the herdsman and relates the story of the Cyclops. Book 10 - Aeolus and Circe: Odysseus describes how he met Aeolus, the Keeper of the Winds, and how his men were caught in a hurricane, destroying their ship. Book 11 - The Journey to Hades: Odysseus tells how he traveled "to the furthest edge of Ocean's stream to the land to which all journey when they die." Book 12 - More Perils on the Way Home: Odysseus relates how he and his men went past the Sirens near the cliff where Scylla is located and is again shipwrecked. Book 13 - The Return to Ithaca: The King orders his men to return Odysseus to Ithaca. Odysseus arrives disguised as a beggar. Book 14 - Odysseus as a Beggar: The swineherd, Eumaeus, welcomes the disguised Odysseus and gives him a meal and a place to sleep. Book 15 - Telemachus Goes Home: Athene tells Telemachus to go home and warns him about the ambush planned by the wooers. Book 16 - Father and Son Reunited: Telemachus manages to avoid the ambush of the wooers and meets the disguised Odysseus. Odysseus' true identity is not discovered until later.
114
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title 9
Books 17-18
10
Books 19-20
11
Books 21-22
12
Books 23-24
Introduction 1
Act I, Scenes 1-5
2
Act II, Scenes 1-6
3
Act III, Scenes 1-5
4
Act IV, Scenes 1-5
5
Act V, Scenes 1-3
Lesson Content Book 17 - Odysseus Arrives at the Palace: Odysseus arrives in town dressed as a beggar. No one recognizes his true identity. Book 18 - The Wooers Torment Odysseus: Odysseus argues with a real beggar and breaks the man's jaw. Book 19 - Penelope and the Beggar Meet: Odysseus, in disguise, talks to Penelope and is finally recognized by some of the servants. Book 20 - Odysseus' Plan: Zeus gives Odysseus a sign the next day, and a prophet tells the suitors of a vision of the future. Book 21 - Contest for the Wooers: Penelope announces she will marry the man who can string the bow. Odysseus asks if he can try. Book 22 - The Death of the Wooers: Odysseus shoots Antinous in the throat with an arrow and fights the wooers with Telemachus. Book 23 - Odysseus and Penelope's Reunion: The mansion burns and Penelope tests Odysseus to prove his true identity. Book 24 - Peace Comes to Ithaca: Odysseus travels to the country to rescue his father, King Laertes, and has to again fight the wooers with Telemachus. Romeo and Juliet Romeo and Juliet face powerful opposition to their love as their families, the Montagues and Capulets, engage in an age-old feud. Neither family is willing to end their violent confrontations with one another. Romeo attends a party given by Juliet's family and meets Juliet. They are immediately drawn to each other. Romeo and Juliet realize they love each other and secretly marry. Tybalt kills Mercutio in a duel. Romeo slays Tybalt and is banished from the city. Juliet is broken hearted. Juliet meets with Friar Laurence and tells him about the situation with Romeo. The friar develops a plan to help Romeo and Juliet. Romeo consults an apothecary and returns to Verona. Several twists of fate end Romeo and Juliet's tragic love.
115
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Study: EB Learning Essay: Descriptive Study: EB Learning Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Essay: Persuasive
Material Material Material Material Material
English Literature IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Book 1 – Chapters 1-3
2
Book 1 – Chapters 4-6
3
Book 2 – Chapters 1-3
4
Book 2 – Chapters 4-6
Lesson Content A Tale of Two Cities A Tale of Two Cities describes the lives of the main characters, Charles Darnay, Dr. Manette, and his daughter, Lucie Manette, during the French Revolution. The story depicts the struggles between the common people and the noble class. Chapter 1 - The Period: The narrator describes the political, social, and economic conditions in France and England in 1775. Chapter 2 - The Mail: On a cold November night, a mail coach travels toward Dover, England. A rider approaches the coach and delivers a strange message to one of the passengers. Chapter 3 - The Night Shadows: The passengers in the coach keep their secrets to themselves, including the passenger who received the curious message from the rider. Chapter 4 - The Preparation: Mr. Jarvis Lorry arrives in Dover and meets with a visitor he is expecting. Chapter 5 - The Wine-shop: Ernest and Madame Defarge own a wine-shop and are soon to host an important family reunion. Chapter 6 - The Shoemaker: The shoemaker, and the events of his life, is shown as a central figure in the novel. Chapter 1 - Five Years Later: Mr. Lorry helps the shoemaker leave France and five years pass. Mr. Lorry now works at Tellson's Bank, a center of business activity in London. Chapter 2 - A Sight: A clerk at Tellson's Bank sends Jerry to the Bailey courts to wait for a message from Mr. Lorry. Mr. Lorry attends the treason trial of Charles Darnay. Chapter 3 - A Disappointment: Evidence at the trial relates to Mr. Lorry's trip from France five years earlier. Chapter 4 - Congratulatory: Charles Darnay is found innocent of the charge of treason. Chapter 5 - The Jackal: A conversation occurs between C.J. Stryver and his assistant, Sydney Carton. Chapter 6 - Hundreds of People: Mr. Lorry visits the Manette home and talks to Miss Pross, the Manette family nurse.
116
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title
5
Book 2 – Chapters 7-9
6
Book 2 – Chapters 10-12
7
Book 2 – Chapters 13-15
8
Book 2 – Chapters 16-18
Lesson Content Chapter 7 - Monseigneur in Town: A French nobleman, the Marquis, hits a child in his coach. His reaction demonstrates the attitude of the French nobility toward the common people. Chapter 8 - Monseigneur in the Country: The Marquis leaves Paris on his journey to his country home. He ignores the needs of the poor people who live in and around a village near his home. Chapter 9 - The Gorgon's Head: The Marquis receives a visit at his home by his nephew, Charles Darnay. They discuss the social conditions of the people of France. Chapter 10 - Two Promises: Darnay plans to ask Dr. Manette for permission to marry Lucie Manette. Chapter 11 - A Companion Picture: C.J. Stryver and Sydney Carton visit in Stryver's law office, and Stryver tells Carton he is considering marriage. Chapter 12 - The Fellow Delicacy: Stryver decides to go to the Manette home and asks Lucie to marry him. Mr. Lorry offers a suggestion as to how Stryver should proceed with the marriage proposal. Chapter 13 - The Fellow of No Delicacy: Sydney Carton talks to Lucie about his lonely life and his feelings toward her. Chapter 14 - The Honest Tradesman: Jerry tells his wife that he has to go out on an errand. Jerry's son follows his father at a distance. Chapter 15 - Knitting: The mender of roads relates the story of Gaspard, and his murder of the Marquis who killed his child. Chapter 16 - Still Knitting: The wine-shop becomes a center of activity for the planning of the French Revolution. A spy tells the Defarges news about Charles Darnay and the Manette family. Chapter 17 - One Night: Lucie and Charles Darnay plan to marry the next day. Lucie spends the evening visiting with her father, Dr. Manette. Chapter 18 - Nine Days: On the day of his wedding, Charles Darnay talks privately with Dr. Manette. Manette is concerned about something Darnay tells him.
117
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title
9
Book 2 – Chapters 19-21
10
Book 2 – Chapters 22-24
11
Book 3 – Chapters 1-3
12
Book 3 – Chapters 4-6
13
Book 3 – Chapters 7-9
Lesson Content Chapter 19 - An Opinion: Mr. Lorry visits Dr. Manette to ask his medical advice about one of Lorry's friends. The doctor leaves to join Lucie and her husband on their honeymoon. Chapter 20 - A Plea: Lucie and Charles Darnay return from their honeymoon, and Sydney Carton is the first person to visit the couple. Chapter 21 - Echoing Footsteps: Lucie and Charles have a happy marriage. They soon have a daughter named Lucie. Chapter 22 - The Sea Still Rises: Weeks after the French Revolution begins, the revolutionaries plan how to kidnap and kill the governor of the district. Chapter 23 - Fire Rises: All of France is in an uproar as the French Revolution continues. People from the village watch the home of the Marquis burn to the ground. Chapter 24 - Drawn to the Loadstone Rock: Mr. Lorry plans to go to France and work in the Tellson Branch in Paris. Darnay receives a letter from an old friend in France asking for his help. Chapter 1 - In Secret: Darnay encounters many difficulties during his journey in France. He is taken into custody by revolutionary guards. Chapter 2 - The Grindstone: Lucie and Dr. Manette visit Mr. Lorry and tell of Charles' arrest. Chapter 3 - The Shadow: Mr. Lorry finds a Paris apartment for Lucie and her family to live in and leaves Jerry to protect the Manette family. Chapter 4 - Calm in Storm: Dr. Manette treats prisoners in three different prisons. Many people, including the King and Queen of France are executed on La Guillotine. Chapter 5 - The Wood-sawyer: Lucie waits for one year and three months while her husband is held in La Force Prison. She becomes friends with a woodsawyer who works nearby. Chapter 6 - Triumph: Charles Darnay's trial begins and the jury votes to set him free. Chapter 7 - A Knock at the Door: The Manettes continue to live in Paris and survive the trying times. Four guards arrest Charles Darnay. Chapter 8 - A Hand at Cards: At the market, Jerry Cruncher and Miss Pross see a man they recognize and accuse him of being a spy. Chapter 9 - The Game Made: Carton tells Lorry that he has a plan to help Charles Darnay.
118
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
English Literature IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title
14
Book 3 – Chapters 10-12
15
Book 3 – Chapters 13-15
1
The Locket
2
The Masque of the Red Death
Lesson Content Chapter 10 - The Substance of the Shadow: The testimony at Charles Darnay's trial involves an incident from years ago that involves the Marquis, the Defarges, and Charles Darnay's family. Chapter 11 - Dusk: Darnay's trial ends in conviction and a death sentence. Carton and Mr. Lorry both agree that nothing can save Charles Darnay. Chapter 12 - Darkness: Madame tells the people in the wine-shop that she plans to denounce Lucie. Carton tells Mr. Lorry that he has a plan to help the Manette family and to save Charles Darnay. Chapter 13 - Fifty-two: On the day of Charles Darnay's execution, events dramatically change the lives of many of the characters, including Darnay, Carton, and the Manette family. Chapter 14 - The Knitting Done: Madame Defarge and her friends hold a meeting at the wine-shop, and she decides to go to the Manette apartment and confront Lucie. Chapter 15 - The Footsteps Die Out For Ever: A large crowd waits in the streets of Paris for the executions to begin. The author reveals the present and future fate of all the characters. Short Stories "The Locket" is set during the Civil War, which was fought between the slave states of the South and the free states of the North. The main theme of "The Masque of the Red Death" is fear of the inevitable as the Prince and his guests attempt to hide from death. They are foolish to believe they can escape by locking themselves inside.
119
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-2
2
Chapters 3-4
3
Chapters 5-6
4
Chapters 7-9
5
Chapters 10-12
6
Chapters 13-15
Lesson Content The Jungle The families of Jurgis Rudkus and Ona Lukoszaite face many obstacles after immigrating to America from Lithuania in the early 1900s. They are defenseless against those people who take advantage of their situation. Chapter 1: Ona Lukoszaite and Jurgis Rudkus celebrate their wedding in Packingtown, located in the stockyards of Chicago. Chapter 2: The characters think about their lives in Lithuania and their journey to America. Chapter 3: - Jokubas Szedvilas considers the journey to America. Others view him as an example of the wonderful opportunities in America. Chapter 4: Jurgis and family members find jobs and consider buying a house. Chapter 5: The family buys a new house and furniture as Jurgis works long, hard hours. Chapter 6: Jurgis and Ona make plans to get married in the fall. Ona takes a job to make extra money for the wedding. Chapter 7: Jurgis and Ona marry in November. Ona and many of the children are sick from the cold, damp working and living conditions. Chapter 8: A representative of the butcher's union talks to Jurgis about joining the union. All the members of the family soon join. Chapter 9: Jurgis learns about the inner workings of Packingtown from union members. He discovers the plants process diseased animals and use chemicals in the meat. Chapter 10: Ona's problems at work continue to worsen. She has a baby, Antanas, named after Jurgis' deceased father. Chapter 11: The living conditions of the family improve and more money is put into a savings account at the bank. Jurgis injures himself on the job and is unable to return to work. Chapter 12: The winter is bitterly cold and the family plunges into yet another crisis as Jonas disappears one day and never returns to the family. Chapter 13: Jurgis takes a job at the fertilizer plant, and the children sell newspapers on the street. Chapter 14: Ona continues to struggle at her job. She is expecting another child, but her and Jurgis's relationship is dissolving. Chapter 15: Jurgis learns that a factory boss named Connor has sexually assaulted Ona. Jurgis attacks Connor and is arrested.
120
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title 7
Chapters 16-17
8
Chapters 18-19
9
Chapters 20-21
10
Chapters 22-23
11
Chapters 24-25
12
Chapters 26-27
13
Chapters 28-29
14
Chapters 30-31
Lesson Content Chapter 16: Jurgis is charged with assault and battery and begins to resent Packingtown for destroying his family. Chapter 17: Stanislovas, Elzbieta's son, visits Jurgis in jail and tells Jurgis of the bitter financial struggles the family faces. Chapter 18: Jurgis is released from prison and finds Ona in premature labor with their second child. He has no money for a doctor. Chapter 19: Jurgis finds a midwife and goes to a saloon where he receives some free food and drink. He returns home to bad news about Ona and the baby. Chapter 20: Jurgis stays continually drunk and finds a job at a harvester works plant that lasts only nine days. Chapter 21: A social worker offers to help with food for the family and helps Jurgis get a job at a steel mill plant. Chapter 22: Jurgis' young son, Antanas, dies. Jurgis walks out of the house and gets on a passing freight train which carries him into the country, far from the horrors and problems of Packingtown. Chapter 23: Jurgis returns to Chicago and is seriously injured in an accident. The injuries force him to beg for food on the streets. Chapter 24: Jurgis meets a wealthy young man collecting illegal wages from companies to give to an Irish politician named Halloran. Chapter 26: Jurgis becomes the boss in the killing rooms at the Durham Plant during a strike. Chapter 27: The police raid the house where Marija works as a prostitute, and Jurgis is taken to the police station. Chapter 28: Jurgis is released and stops at a hall where a meeting is being held. He is fascinated by what the speaker is saying. Chapter 29: Jurgis learns that the Socialists want to fight the power of the Beef Trust. Chapter 30: Jurgis becomes enthusiastic about the concepts and prospects of Socialism helping workers in the packing plants. Chapter 31: Jurgis is asked to attend a meeting at the home of a Socialist millionaire named Fisher. The Socialists make huge gains in the election.
121
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
Introduction 1
Act I, Scenes 1-3
2
Act II, Scenes 1-4
3
Act III, Scenes 1-3
4
Act IV, Scenes 1-3
5
Act V, Scenes 1-5
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-4
Lesson Content Julius Caesar Julius Caesar is in a powerful position to seize control of the country, yet he must deal with the suspicions of the Senate and the constant fighting between other military leaders before he achieves his ambitious goals. Caesar celebrates his military defeat of Pompey but receives a warning from a soothsayer about future events. Men plot Caesar's assassination and meet with Brutus. Caesar's wife persuades him not to go to the Senate, but one of the conspirators convinces him to change his mind. Although both Artemidorus and the soothsayer try to warn Caesar, their warnings are of no use and Caesar goes to the senate. He is murdered by a conspirator. The Roman Empire is in a state of confusion as the supporters and enemies of Caesar prepare to fight each other. The leaders of both sides meet to discuss a peaceful settlement, but the fighting begins and some of the leaders commit suicide. Great Expectations In Great Expectations, the main character of the story, Pip, learns to value friendship over wealth and power. Chapter 1: Pip lives with his older sister and her husband. He is visiting the graves of his parents and is threatened by an escaped convict. Chapter 2: When Pip gets home, his sister is angry because he has worried her. The next morning Pip gathers supplies for the convict. Chapter 3: Pip finds the convict and gives him the supplies. Chapter 4: Pip lies to his sister about where he has been, and no one has discovered that he has stolen anything.
122
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
2
Chapters 5-9
3
Chapters 10-11
4
Chapters 12-15
5
Chapters 16-18
6
Chapters 19-20
Lesson Content Chapter 5: Pip's sister discovers the missing food. Pip is afraid the convict will reveal his secret. Chapter 6: When Pip and his brother-in-law return home, they tell the family about their adventure. Chapter 7: Pip goes to school where he meets a girl named Biddy. Pip's sister returns from the market with news that a wealthy woman named Miss Havisham needs a playmate for her ward. Chapter 8: Pip goes to Miss Havisham's home and meets her beautiful ward, Estella, who is about Pip's age. Chapter 9: Pip's sister is curious about his visit to Miss Havisham's home, but he is reluctant to tell her the story. Chapter 10: Pip wants Estella to like him, and he wants to become educated. Chapter 11: Pip visits Miss Havisham's house again where Estella introduces him to some of her other relatives. Pip goes into the garden where he gets into a fight with another boy. Chapter 12: Pip goes to Miss Havisham's house every other day and tells her that he wants to be better educated. Miss Havisham eventually decides Pip needs to become Joe's apprentice. Chapter 13: Joe and Pip go to see Miss Havisham and she gives Joe money for Pip's services. Chapter 14: Pip begins to work as an apprentice and realizes he is ashamed of his home. Chapter 15: Pip stops going to school, but he continues to find ways to learn. He discovers his sister has been badly injured in an accident. Chapter 16: Pip's sister must stay in bed because of her injuries. Biddy comes to live with the family and help with chores and care for Mrs. Joe. Chapter 17: Pip becomes friends with Biddy, who tells Pip she thinks Orlick likes her, which disturbs Pip. Chapter 18: After Pip has been an apprentice for four years, a lawyer, Mr. Jaggers, tells him that someone has offered to support him financially. Chapter 19: Pip goes to the tailor, Mr. Trabb, to get some new clothes and then goes to visit Miss Havisham to say goodbye. Chapter 20: When Pip arrives in London, he goes directly to Mr. Jaggers' busy office.
123
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
7
Chapters 21-23
8
Chapters 24-26
9
Chapters 27-29
10
Chapters 30-32
11
Chapters 33-35
Lesson Content Chapter 21: Pip finds a place to live and meets Herbert Pocket, whom he thinks he has met somewhere before. Chapter 22: Herbert and Pip become friends, and Herbert tells Pip about Miss Havisham's background. Chapter 23: Pip meets the Pocket family and two students, Drummle and Startop. Chapter 24: Pip goes back to London and meets with Mr. Jaggers about his living arrangements. He is invited to visit Wemmick's home. Chapter 25: Pip tells Herbert how he feels about the two students he met at the family dinner. Chapter 26: Pip and Herbert are invited to dinner at Mr. Jaggers' house, where Drummle and Startop are also guests. Chapter 27: Joe sends a letter to Pip telling him he and Mr. Wopsle are coming to London, and he wants to visit. Joe tells Pip that Miss Havisham wants to see him and that Estella is back in town. Chapter 28: Pip goes by coach to see Miss Havisham and recognizes two of the other passengers as convicts. He avoids talking to them. Chapter 29: Pip finds Miss Havisham visiting with a woman he later recognizes as Estella. Chapter 30: Pip tells Herbert about his visit with Miss Havisham and Estella and confesses he has always loved Estella. Chapter 31: Pip and Herbert watch Mr. Wopsle's play, which turns out to be quite bad, and they have dinner together. Chapter 32: Pip receives word that Estella will be arriving the next day on a coach. He plans to meet her at the station. Chapter 33: Estella tells Pip she will be staying with a family in Richmond and asks him to visit her as much as possible. Pip is sad when he has to leave. Chapter 34: Pip and Herbert are deeply in debt. Pip gets a letter telling him that his sister has passed away, and he leaves for her funeral. Chapter 35: After the funeral, Pip takes a walk with Biddy. She tells him of her plans to become the mistress of the new school.
124
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
English Literature X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
12
Chapters 36-38
13
Chapters 39-40
14
Chapters 41-43
15
Chapters 44-46
16
Chapters 47-49
Lesson Content Chapter 36: On his twenty-first birthday, Pip visits Mr. Jaggers and asks the identity of his benefactor. Jaggers refuses to tell him. Chapter 37: Pip goes to Mr. Wemmick's house for dinner, where he meets a woman named Miss Skiffins. Chapter 38: Pip visits Estella in Richmond and escorts her and the women she lives with to parties and other social gatherings. Chapter 39: Several years later, while Pip is at home, an old man comes to his door asking for Pip. Pip soon recognizes him as the convict and realizes this man is his benefactor. Chapter 40: The next morning, Pip stumbles over someone lying at the bottom of the stairs, but the man runs away before Pip can talk to him. Chapter 41: Herbert helps Pip find a place for the convict to live, and the two discuss what to do next. Chapter 42: The convict, Magwitch, talks about his childhood and the events that caused his prison term. Chapter 43: Pip decides to leave the country with Magwitch but first goes to visit Estella. He finds she has gone back to Miss Havisham's. Chapter 44: Pip arrives at Miss Havisham's home and confronts her with the information he learned from Magwitch. He professes his love to Estella. Chapter 45: Pip goes to visit Wemmick the next morning, and Wemmick warns Pip about Magwitch's safety. Chapter 46: Pip and Herbert go to the apartments where Magwitch stays, telling the others he is Mr. Campbell. Chapter 47: Pip decides to go to a play that Mr. Wopsle is in. After the show, Wopsle tells Pip some disturbing news. Chapter 48: Pip goes to dinner at Mr. Jaggers' house, who tells Pip that Miss Havisham wants to see him about a business matter. Chapter 49: Pip goes to Miss Havisham's house, and she tells him she is sorry for the way she treated him. Later, Pip finds Miss Havisham's life is in danger.
125
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
17
Chapters 50-53
18
Chapters 54-56
19
Chapters 57-59
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-3
Lesson Content Chapter 50: Pip is injured trying to help Miss Havisham. Herbert tells him Magwitch revealed the story of the woman he would not talk about earlier. Chapter 51: Pip goes to see Mr. Jaggers and tells him of his business with Miss Havisham and the revelation of Estella's parentage. Chapter 52: Pip plans to see Wemmick, but a note arrives saying he must go alone to the marshes back in his own village. Chapter 53: Pip obeys the instructions and goes to the marshes, where he is attacked and tied up. Chapter 54: Pip and Magwitch plan to leave the country by boat and spend the night at a public house. Some men come who are looking for Magwitch. Chapter 55: Herbert tells Pip he is now a partner in the business and will move to Cairo, Egypt, and offers Pip a job in the company. Chapter 56: Pip visits Magwitch often in prison. Magwitch tells Pip something very important and dies. Chapter 57: Pip is very ill for several days and Joe comes to care for him. He realizes what a good friend Joe has been to him. Chapter 58: Pip returns to his village to help Joe at the forge and finds that things have changed. Pip joins Herbert at the firm in Egypt. Chapter 59: Years later, Pip comes back to see Joe and Biddy and their growing family. Pip tells Biddy that he is over Estella, although it is untrue. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn Huck Finn is a young man accustomed to having the freedom to set his own schedule and do what he wants to do. Huck's life changes dramatically when the Widow Douglas adopts him with the intention to make him a proper gentleman. Chapter 1: Huck sneaks out at night with Tom Sawyer at the first opportunity. Chapter 2: Miss Watson's slave, Jim, hears Huck and Tom Sawyer leave the house. They plan to start a robber band with some of their friends. Chapter 3: Huck hears that a drowned man was found floating in the river. Some people believe the dead man is Huck's father.
126
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
2
Chapters 4-7
3
Chapters 8-10
4
Chapters 11-13
5
Chapters 14-16
6
Chapters 17-18
7
Chapters 19-20
Lesson Content Chapter 4: Huck lives with the Widow Douglas for four months and attends school on a regular basis before he realizes his father (Pap) has returned. Chapter 5: Huck is surprised to see Pap when he returns to his room. Pap is upset because Huck is going to school and wearing good clothes. Chapter 6: The Widow Douglas tells Pap to leave her property. Pap kidnaps Huck and takes him to a log cabin on the river. Chapter 7: Pap locks Huck in the cabin and leaves for town. Huck manages to escape and floats down the river in a canoe to Jackson Island. Chapter 8: People from town believe Huck has drowned. Huck finds Miss Watson's runaway slave Jim is living on the island. Chapter 9: Jim and Huck explore the house they found floating down the river during a flood and find many items they can use on their trip. Chapter 10: Huck decides to go to town to find out some news and stops at a house. He disguises himself as a girl so no one will recognize him. Chapter 11: A lady in town says people believe Jim killed Huck and are going to search Jackson Island. Chapter 12: During a terrible storm, Huck and Jim spot a wrecked steamboat. They sneak on board and hear the voices of robbers. Chapter 13: Jim and Huck lose their raft in a storm but manage to steal a small boat. Chapter 14: Huck and Jim find time to relax for a few days. Huck tells Jim stories about King Solomon and his great wisdom. Chapter 15: Jim wants to reach Cairo, Illinois, where the Ohio River empties into the Mississippi River and seek refuge in the free states. Chapter 16: A steamboat strikes Huck and Jim's raft and tosses them overboard. Huck swims to shore and is unable find Jim. Chapter 17: Huck finds a family who befriends him when they determine Huck is not from the Shepherdson family. Chapter 18: Huck discovers Jim asleep in the swamp. They take a raft and head downriver. Chapter 19: Huck and Jim float downriver and encounter two men claiming to be the Duke of Bridgewater and the son of the King of France. Chapter 20: Huck tells the king and duke he is the son of a farmer and Jim is his family's slave. The group attend a revival.
127
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
8
Chapters 21-23
9
Chapters 24-26
10
Chapters 27-29
11
Chapters 30-32
12
Chapters 33-35
Lesson Content Chapter 21: The king and duke practice their parts in the Shakespeare play they will present, and they rent the courthouse. Chapter 22: Only twelve people attend the Shakespeare play performed by the duke and the king. Chapter 23: During the performance, the king appears on stage completely naked. They hastily leave the upset townspeople. Chapter 24: The king and duke learn of a recently deceased man named Peter Wilks. The men plan to defraud the estate of the money. Chapter 25: The king and duke meet the three Wilks sisters. They study the six thousand dollars and house the girls inherit from the estate. Chapter 26: Huck decides to stop the king and duke from stealing the girls' money. He takes the money from the mattress. Chapter 27: Huck hides the money in Peter Wilks' coffin. The king and duke decide to sell everything including the Wilks family's slaves. Chapter 28: Huck makes plans to save the girls' money as two men from England arrived in town who claimed to be the real brothers of Peter Wilks. Chapter 29: The two men from England have lost their luggage and cannot prove their identity. One of the brothers from England claims he can identify the tattoo on the chest of his deceased brother. They proceed to the cemetery and dig up the coffin. They find the money put there by Huck. The king, duke, and Huck manage to escape during the confusion that follows. Chapter 30: The king is angry at Huck for trying to get away from him, and the king and duke have an argument about losing the money. Chapter 31: The group arrives at Pikesville, a village along the Mississippi River. Huck learns Jim was sold to a farmer named Phelps. Chapter 32: Huck arrives at the Phelps farm to find Jim and learns that Tom Sawyer is on his way. Huck tells the family he will get his luggage and heads back to the village to meet up with Tom. Chapter 33: Huck meets Tom on the way back to Pikesville. Tom thought Huck had been murdered and is glad to see him. The duke and king end up being punished by people in the village. Chapter 34: Huck and Tom work on a plan to help Jim escape. Chapter 35: Tom plans to use case knives instead of a shovel and pick to dig a hole.
128
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
13
Chapters 36-39
14
Chapters 40-43
Lesson Content Chapter 36: Huck and Tom begin to dig the hole and steal items from the house including tin plates and a brass candlestick. Chapter 37: Aunt Sally notices several items missing from the house, and Tom develops a plan to confuse her. Chapter 38: Tom's strange plan continues as he decides Jim should have a coat-of-arms. Jim helps them get an old grindstone. Chapter 39: Huck and Tom catch several rats to put in Jim's cell. Aunt Sally's son frees the rats. Aunt Sally beats Tom and Huck for bringing rats into the house. Chapter 40: Fifteen armed men arrive at the Phelps farm on the night of Jim's escape. Tom is wounded in the escape. Huck gets help while Jim stays with Tom. Chapter 41: Huck finds a doctor to help Tom. The doctor goes to the raft alone while Huck meets Uncle Silas. Huck tells him that Sid (Tom) has gone out to find news about what happened. Chapter 42: The doctor returns the next day with Jim and Tom. Aunt Polly arrives and tells everyone the true identity of Huck and Tom. Chapter 43: Tom reveals Jim is a free man because Miss Watson died and set him free in her will.
129
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-4
2
Chapters 5-13
Lesson Content Moby Dick Herman Melville, the author of Moby Dick, presents a characterization of Ahab, the captain of the whaling ship Pequod, as a man who truly has an obsession with a great white whale known as Moby Dick. Chapter 1 - Loomings: The narrator, Ishmael, introduces himself at the beginning of the novel as a simple sailor who goes to sea from time to time. Chapter 2 - The Carpet-Bag: Ishmael is headed for Nantucket and plans to join a whaling voyage. Chapter 3 - The Spouter-Inn: The Spouter-Inn, operated by Peter Coffin, is dirty, run down, and crowded. Ishmael is informed that he will have to share a bed with a harpooner from New Zealand. Chapter 4 - The Counterpane: Ishmael wakes up and meets Queequeg, his roommate, the harpooner from New Zealand. Chapter 5 – Breakfast: Ishmael goes downstairs to eat breakfast and notices the sailors look out of place on land. Chapter 6 - The Street: After breakfast, Ishmael takes a walk around New Bedford. He sees people in the streets from many foreign countries on their way to Nantucket because of the whaling industry. Chapter 7 - The Chapel: Ishmael enters a chapel in New Bedford dedicated to whalemen with memorials honoring sailors who lost their lives at sea. Chapter 8 - The Pulpit: Father Mapple, a former harpooner turned preacher, enters the chapel and climbs into the pulpit. Chapter 9 - The Sermon: After calling the congregation to order, Father Mapple begins the sermon, which focuses on the story of Jonah and the whale. Chapter 10 - A Bosom Friend: Ishmael returns to the Spouter-Inn and becomes friends with Queequeg. He joins Queequeg in his idol worship in hopes that Queequeg will join him in Christian worship. Chapter 11 – Nightgown: The two new friends share a smoke from Queequeg's tomahawk pipe as Queequeg tells Ishmael the story of his life. Chapter 12 – Biographical: Queequeg relates to Ishmael that he is the son of a king and the nephew of a High Priest from the island of Kokovoko. He left his island to see the world and learn about Christianity. Chapter 13 – Wheelbarrow: The next morning Ishmael and Queequeg put their belongings in a wheelbarrow and board a ship that will take them to Nantucket.
130
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
3
Chapters 14-19
Lesson Content Chapter 14 - Nantucket: Ishmael and Queequeg stop at an inn recommended by Peter Coffin. Chapter 15 - Chowder: Ishmael and Queequeg stop at the Try Pots Inn and meet Hosea Hussey and Mrs. Hussey. Hosea is the owner of the inn and the cousin of Peter Coffin. Chapter 16 - The Ship: Ishmael and Queequeg arrive at the Nantucket docks and talk to the owner of the whaling ship Pequod and join the crew. Chapter 17 - The Ramadan: Queequeg stays in his room all day at the Try Pots Inn observing the feast of Ramadan. Ishmael becomes worried when Queequeg does not answer the door, so he asks Mrs. Hussey to unlock it. Chapter 18 - His Mark: The owners of the Pequod are hesitant to sign Queequeg on to the crew because he is a cannibal, but allow him to join after he demonstrates his skill of throwing a harpoon. Chapter 19 - The Prophet: A man named Elijah warns Ishmael and Queequeg about sailing on the Pequod and tells them about Ahab, the captain.
131
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
4
Chapters 20-29
Lesson Content Chapter 20 - All Astir: The Pequod is prepared for the voyage, and Ishmael is concerned about sailing with a captain he does not know. Chapter 21 - Going Aboard: Elijah again stops Ishmael and attempts to talk him out of sailing with Captain Ahab, but Ishmael and Queequeg finally board the Pequod. Ishmael believes he has seen shadowy figures on the Pequod. Chapter 22 - Merry Christmas: The Pequod leaves Nantucket early Christmas morning, and the Pequod's owners guide the ship out of the harbor. Chapter 23 - The Lee Shore: Ishmael sees a man named Bulkington, whom he had met at the Spouter-Inn, at the helm of the ship guiding it out of port. Chapter 24 - The Advocate: Ishmael relates the importance of the whaling industry and how the whale represents the unknown mysteries of the sea. Chapter 25 - Postscript: Ishmael continues his description of the importance of whaling and explains the value of whale oil. Chapter 26 - Knights and Squires: Starbuck, a Quaker and a native of Nantucket, is the chief mate of the Pequod. The other officers of the ship are also identified in this chapter. Chapter 27 - Knights and Squires: Stubb is the second mate of the Pequod, a man named Flask is third mate, and Queequeg is selected as Starbuck's harpooner. Chapter 28 - Ahab: The mysterious Captain Ahab finally makes an appearance on deck. He has one artificial leg fashioned from the bone of a whale. Chapter 29 - Enter Ahab; to Him, Stubb: The Pequod reaches the water of the tropics, and Ahab has an argument with Stubb, the second mate.
132
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
5
Chapters 30-35
6
Chapters 36-42
Lesson Content Chapter 30 - The Pipe: Captain Ahab gets his pipe after the confrontation with Stubb, but smoking the pipe doesn't soothe him, and he throws it in the sea. Chapter 31 - Queen Mab: Stubb tells Flask of his dream about Ahab. Captain Ahab shouts to the crew to be on the lookout for whales. Chapter 32 - Cetology: The narrator discusses the subject of cetology, the study of whales. Ishmael classifies whales into three books: the Folio, Octavo, and Duodecimo. Chapter 33 - The Specksynder: Ishmael describes the daily operations of the Pequod and how the harpooners are very important members of the crew of a whaling ship. Chapter 34 - The Cabin-Table: The eating arrangements of the crew are a reminder of the levels of authority on the Pequod, as the harpooners eat in the cabin of the captain. Chapter 35 - The Mast-Head: Ishmael makes his first visit to the mast-head, an area located at the top of one of the ship's masts where men are stationed to constantly look for whales. Chapter 36 - The Quarter-Deck: Captain Ahab calls his crew together on the quarter deck and offers an ounce of gold to anyone who spots Moby Dick, the white whale that took off his leg. Chapter 37 - Sunset: Captain Ahab sits alone in his cabin and explains the struggle to find and kill the whale. Chapter 38 - Dusk: Starbuck is worried about his relationship with Ahab, but feels pity for him. He also fears what Ahab might do to get the white whale. Chapter 39 - First Night-Watch: This chapter is written from the viewpoint of Stubb, an easy-going, light-hearted person who thinks that events are predestined to happen in a certain manner. Chapter 40 - Midnight, Forecastle: The crew is cheerful and looks forward to the hunt of the white whale, but there is still a mood of tension on the ship. Chapter 41 - Moby Dick: The author foreshadows the grave danger the crew will face in the hunt for Moby Dick. Captain Ahab believes that Moby Dick represents the evil in the world. Chapter 42 - The Whiteness of the Whale: The author and the narrator describe the significance of Moby Dick's whiteness, which can be a symbol of purity or innocence, but Ishmael also sees white as terrifying because it is not really a color, but rather the absence of color.
133
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Short Answer
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
7
Chapters 43-48
8
Chapters 49-54
Lesson Content Chapter 43 - Hark!: Men on night watch are standing in a line passing water buckets to each other. One of the crew hears a noise below the deck that sounds like a cough and believes there are people sleeping below deck. Chapter 44 - The Chart: Captain Ahab sits in his cabin studying a variety of sea charts and plans the hunt for Moby Dick. Chapter 45 - The Affidavit: Ishmael describes how whales can be harpooned and still escape. Some attack and destroy whaling ships, killing the crew. Chapter 46 - Surmises: Captain Ahab has to balance his focus on Moby Dick and the hunt for other whales as he has an obligation to the Pequod's owners and crew to make money. Chapter 47 - The Mat-Maker: Queequeg and Ishmael construct a sword mat that attaches to the side of the whaleboats for additional protection. The lookout calls out that a sperm whale is sighted. Chapter 48 - The First Lowering: Each of the three mates command a whaleboat, but the hunt is unsuccessful. Chapter 49 - The Hyena: Ishmael is thrown into the sea during the first hunt and laughs at the irony of the situation because he is an experienced sailor. He is frightened enough to write up a will naming Queequeg as the beneficiary. Chapter 50 - Ahab's Boat and Crew. Fedallah: Stubb is impressed that Ahab will go on a whale hunt with only one leg, and there is some question about whether or not a captain should risk his life hunting whales in a small boat. Chapter 51 - The Spirit-Spout: The Pequod crew is excited about the possibility of a hunt when a spout is sighted. Chapter 52 - The Albatross: The Pequod meets another whaling ship called the Goney (Albatross). A storm approaches and the two ships' captains are unable to communicate with each other. Chapter 53 - The Gam: A meeting (gam) of two whaling ships is a common event. The captains of the ships often exchange information about the locations of whales, but Ahab's only interest in contact with other ships is to get information about the white whale. Chapter 54 - The Town-Ho's Story: The Pequod meets the Town-Ho, a Polynesian whaling ship, and the captain has information about Moby Dick.
134
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
9
Chapters 55-63
Lesson Content Chapter 55 - Of the Monstrous Pictures of Whales: Ishmael relates information about whale art and the lack of accurate pictures of whales. Chapter 56 - Of the Less Erroneous Pictures of Whales, and the True Pictures of Whaling Scenes: The discussion of whale art continues. Chapter 57 - Of Whales in Paint; in Teeth; in Wood; in Sheet-iron; in Stone; in Mountains; in Stars: The author describes how whale art is present in all cultures and societies so all people can relate to the search for Moby Dick. Chapter 58 - Brit: The Pequod sails through a yellow substance called brit, a primary food of the Right Whale. Chapter 59 - Squid: The Pequod goes to the island of Java, and Daggoo shouts that he has spotted the white whale. It turns out to be a giant squid. Chapter 60 - The Line: The importance of the whale line which is attached to a harpoon and connects the whale to the boat is described. Chapter 61 - Stubb Kills a Whale: Ishmael spots a sperm whale, and Ahab orders the boats into the water. Stubb's crew makes the first kill. Chapter 62 - The Dart: The author describes the whale hunt and the grave danger in the final stages of killing a whale. Chapter 63 - The Crotch: The crotch of a boat is a notched stick that attaches to one end of the boat where the harpooner rests the harpoons.
135
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
10
Chapters 64-72
Lesson Content Chapter 64 - Stubb's Supper: The dead whale is tied to the side of the Pequod, and Stubb orders Daggoo to cut some whale meat for supper. Chapter 65 - The Whale as a Dish: Ishmael describes how whale meat is eaten by many different cultures, but most people don't eat it because it is fatty. Chapter 66 - The Shark Massacre: A number of sharks attack the whale tied to the ship. Queequeg escapes serious injury trying to fight off the sharks. Chapter 67 - Cutting In: The author provides an account of how a whale is butchered. The Pequod nearly capsizes while the whale is being butchered. Chapter 68 - The Blanket: The description of the butchering process continues. Chapter 69 - The Funeral: The whale is beheaded after the skin is removed, and the head is tied to the side of the ship. Chapter 70 - The Sphynx: Ahab goes out on deck to look at the head of the whale tied to the ship and attempts to communicate with the whale. Chapter 71 - The Jeroboam's Story: The Pequod comes upon the Jeroboam, a whaling ship from Nantucket with an epidemic on board. Chapter 72 - The Monkey-Rope: Ishmael again describes the process of butchering a whale. Queequeg and Ishmael work to skin the whale.
136
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
11
Chapters 73-81
12
Chapters 82-87
Lesson Content Chapter 73 - Stubb and Flask Kill a Right Whale; and Have a Talk over Him: Flask tells Stubb a ship with the head of a sperm whale on the starboard side and the head of a right whale on her other side will not capsize. Chapter 74 - The Sperm Whale's Head - Contrasted View: The right whale is killed and towed to the ship. The whale's head is tied to the side of the Pequod. Chapter 75 - The Right Whale's Head - Contrasted View: The differences in the right whale and the sperm whale are described. Chapter 76 - The Battering Ram: The head of the sperm whale is compared to a battering ram, the skull being very thick and hard to penetrate. Chapter 77 - The Great Heidelburgh Tun: Ishmael notes the case and the junk, upper parts of a whale's head. Chapter 78 - Cistern and Buckets: Tashtego falls into the hole at the top of the whale's skull and disappears. Queequeg saves Tashtego. Chapter 79 - The Prairie: Once again, Melville and Ishmael discuss the appearance of the sperm whale. Chapter 80 - The Nut: The skull of an adult sperm whale is at least twenty feet long, its brain is small compared to the size of the skull, and its spine is large. Chapter 81 - The Pequod meets the Virgin: The Pequod meets the Jungfrau (Virgin in German), a German ship, and both ships hunt whales. Chapter 82 - The Honor and Glory of Whaling: Ishmael relates the history of whaling and states that Perseus was the first whaler. Chapter 83 - Jonah Historically Regarded: Some people from Nantucket do not believe the story of Jonah and the whale. Chapter 84 - Pitchpoling: A pitchpole is a long lance attached to a rope. It is lighter than a harpoon and is used to secure a whale after it is harpooned. Chapter 85 - The Fountain: A whale can remain underwater for extended times, and when it surfaces, it sends a fountain of water from its spout. Chapter 86 - The Tail: The tail of the sperm whale can be as large as fifty square feet. Chapter 87 - The Grand Armada: The Pequod sails into the Indian Ocean and the Java Sea. A whale is sighted, and the hunt begins again. A pirate ship is sighted following the Pequod during the hunt.
137
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
13
Chapters 88-96
Lesson Content Chapter 88 - Schools and Schoolmasters: Large herds of whales are not common. They are usually found in groups of twenty to fifty, called schools. Chapter 89 - Fast-Fish and Loose Fish: Sometimes a whale is harpooned but the wounded animal will somehow escape. Chapter 90 - Heads or Tails: There is a law with regard to killing a whale off the coast of England; the head must go to the king and the tail to the queen. Chapter 91 - The Pequod Meets the Rose-Bud: The Pequod meets the RoseBud, a French whaling ship with two dead whales tied to the sides of the ship. Chapter 92 - Ambergris: Ishmael describes ambergris and explains how it is used. He denies that all whales smell bad. Chapter 93 - The Castaway: Not all of the crew members go on the whale hunts, as some of the men stay behind to man the main ship. Chapter 94 - A Squeeze of the Hand: Stubb's crew kills a sperm whale, and the Pequod's crew removes the sperm from the whale. Chapter 95 - The Cassock: The anatomy of the sperm whale and other aspects of the butchering process is described. Chapter 96 - The Try-Works: The try-works of the whaling ship, a large furnace used to melt whale blubber, is described.
138
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
14
Chapters 97-104
Lesson Content Chapter 97 - The Lamp: Ishmael describes the crew's living conditions on the Pequod and states the men can use all the whale oil they need to light this area. Chapter 98 - Stowing Down and Clearing Up: The oil from the whale is stored in barrels and placed into the hold of the ship. Chapter 99 - The Doubloon: Any sailor who spots Moby Dick will get a doubloon, a gold coin from Ecuador. Chapter 100 - Leg and Arm. The Pequod, of Nantucket, Meets the Samuel Enderby, of London: The Pequod meets the British whaling ship Samuel Enderby. The captain of the Samuel Enderby, Boomer, says he has lost an arm to Moby Dick. Chapter 101 - The Decanter: Samuel Enderby is the founder of a famous whaling company in England. The crews of the two ships share a meal. Chapter 102 - A Bower in the Arsacides: Ishmael discusses the details of the of the whale's skeleton. Chapter 103 - Measurement of the Whale's Skeleton: The size of the sperm whale is described and compared to the size of a whaling ship. Chapter 104 - The Fossil Whale: Ishmael states that fossil remains of whales are found all over the world.
139
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
15
Chapters 105-113
Lesson Content Chapter 105 - Does the Whale's Magnitude Diminish? - Will He Perish?: Ishmael discusses how the size of the whale has increased over time. Chapter 106 - Ahab's Leg: Captain Ahab cracks his ivory leg as he leaves the Samuel Enderby and calls on the carpenter to make him a new leg. Chapter 107 - The Carpenter: Ishmael introduces the carpenter of the Pequod, a very skilled man who performs many duties. Chapter 108 - Ahab and the Carpenter: The carpenter measures Ahab for his new leg, but Captain Ahab has a low opinion of the carpenter. Chapter 109 - Ahab and Starbuck in the Cabin: The Pequod is sailing for Japan, but some of the barrels holding the whale oil are leaking. Chapter 110 - Queequeg in his Coffin: Queequeg becomes ill with a high fever. His condition worsens, and he thinks he is going to die. Chapter 111 - The Pacific: The Pequod sails into the Pacific Ocean as Ahab becomes even more obsessed with finding and killing Moby Dick. Chapter 112 - The Blacksmith: The carpenter finishes working on Ahab's new leg, and the blacksmith now fashions a buckle for the leg. Chapter 113 - The Forge: Ahab asks the blacksmith to make a large harpoon out of the hard steel used in horseshoes.
140
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
16
Chapters 114-128
Lesson Content Chapter 114 - The Gilder: The Pequod's crew hunts the waters around Japan but is unable to find any whales. Chapter 115 - The Pequod Meets the Bachelor: The Pequod meets the Bachelor, whose crew is very happy after several successful whale kills. Chapter 116 - The Dying Whale: The crew of the Pequod has a successful hunt, killing four whales. Captain Ahab kills one of the whales. Chapter 117 - The Whale Watch: Fedallah and Ahab sit in their whaleboat waiting for the fourth whale to die. Chapter 118 - The Quadrant: It is time for the Pequod to head toward the equator because the migrating whales will be gathering in that area. Chapter 119 - The Candles: The Pequod is struck by a powerful typhoon. The sail canvas is torn from the mast, and lightning strikes the ship. Chapter 120 - The Deck Towards the End of the First Night Watch: Starbuck tells Ahab the ship is not in safe condition. Chapter 121 - Midnight - The Forecastle Bulwarks: Stubb and Flask tie down the anchor and argue about the danger the ship faces from the storm. Chapter 122 - Midnight Aloft - Thunder and Lightning: Tashtego attempts to tie down the main sails at the top of the masts. Chapter 123 - The Musket: The typhoon finally ends, and the crew assesses the damage to the Pequod and its equipment. Chapter 124 - The Needle: The Pequod readies to sail the next morning, and Ahab sets the new course for the steersman. Chapter 125 - The Log and Line: Ahab must find a new navigation tool for the Pequod, so the crew uses a log and line to navigate. Chapter 126 - The Life-Buoy: The Pequod continues toward the equator. One of the sailors falls overboard and drowns. Chapter 127 - The Deck: Starbuck asks the carpenter to make a new life buoy out of Queequeg's coffin. Ahab comes on deck and mocks the carpenter. Chapter 128 - The Pequod Meets the Rachel: The Pequod meets the whaling ship Rachel that encountered Moby Dick the previous day.
141
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
17
Chapters 129-135
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-5
2
Chapters 6-9
Lesson Content Chapter 129 - The Cabin: Ahab leaves his cabin to prepare for the hunt to find and kill Moby Dick. He tells Pip to stay in the cabin. Chapter 130 - The Hat: Captain Ahab paces the deck looking for Moby Dick. Fedallah and Ahab keep watch for the white whale around the clock. A hawk swoops down and takes Captain Ahab's hat. Chapter 131 - The Pequod Meets the Delight: The Pequod meets the Delight, a whaling ship damaged by an encounter with Moby Dick. Chapter 132 - The Symphony: The Pequod nears the equator. Ahab thinks about his family and what he gave up for whaling. Chapter 133 - The Chase - First Day: Ahab sees Moby Dick swimming near the Pequod. Moby Dick turns around and attacks Ahab's boat. Chapter 134 - The Chase - Second Day: The crew finds Moby Dick again the next day, and Moby Dick attacks the whaleboats. Chapter 135 - The Chase -Third Day: The pursuit of Moby Dick continues on the third day, and the scene is set for the climax of the novel. The Last of the Mohicans The Last of the Mohicans is an adventurous story about a group of individuals whose paths cross in the depths of the wilderness. Chapter 1: The French and English are fighting a war in North America, and there is news that a large French force is approaching Fort William Henry. Chapter 2: The English army secures the services of Magua to guide the sisters Cora and Alice, and Heyward to Fort William Henry. Chapter 3: Hawkeye, Uncas, and Chingachgook discuss life as they travel through the forest. Chapter 4: The party heads for Fort William Henry and meets Hawkeye and the two Mohicans. The honesty of Magua as a guide comes into question. Chapter 5: Magua disappears into the forest after an altercation with Hawkeye. Hawkkeye offers to help guide the party to the fort. Chapter 6: The group decides to stay at a cave for the night. Chapter 7: Some of the group members leave the cave to determine the source of a sound they heard. Hurons suddenly attack the men. Chapter 8: The members of the group retreat to the cave and make plans for an escape. Chapter 9: Heyward, David, and the two sisters stay in the cave and are captured.
142
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
3
Chapters 10-13
4
Chapters 14-17
5
Chapters 18-21
6
Chapters 22-25
Lesson Content Chapter 10: The Hurons treat the captives well and continue to look for Hawkeye. Chapter 11: Magua and Heyward have a meeting regarding Munro's daughters. Cora becomes angry and announces the captives will die. Chapter 12: Hawkeye and the Mohicans arrive in time to save the group, and they resume their trip to Fort William Henry. Chapter 13: The group makes good time on the journey and stops to rest at a Mohican burial site. The Hurons come to the site but soon leave. Chapter 14: The group leaves the Mohican burial site and continues toward the fort. French forces and a dense fog hinder their arrival. Chapter 15: Cora and Alice stay at the fort with their father. News arrives that the French have captured Hawkeye. Chapter 16: Montcalm meets with Munro and gives him a letter from General Webb in which a surrender is offered and a treaty is signed. Chapter 17: The English forces begin their evacuation from the fort when an incident occurs that initiates a massacre. Chapter 18: Cora and Alice are kidnapped, and David Gamut follows them. Hawkeye and his friends search for the two girls the following day. Chapter 19: Hawkeye and his men stay the night at the fort to discuss their plans. An Oneida Indian stalks the men but is killed by Uncas. Chapter 20: The men leave the fort on their search for the two girls and discover Huron Indians are following them; gunfire is exchanged. Chapter 21: The trip has been exhausting for Hawkeye and his men so they divide into two groups and find David Gamut. Chapter 22: Gamut has news about the status of Cora and Alice, and the men discuss how they will rescue the girls. Chapter 23: The disguised Heyward and Gamut enter the Indian village where Alice is being held, and some children spot the two men. Chapter 24: The chief wants Heyward to help a sick woman of the tribe. Magua is at the Indian village but does not recognize Heyward. Chapter 25: Hawkeye is in disguise at the cavern where Heyward is trying to help the sick woman, so Heyward does not recognize him.
143
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
7
Chapters 26-29
8
Chapters 30-33
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-2
2
Chapters 3-4
3
Chapters 5-6
Lesson Content Chapter 26: Hawkeye returns to the village to find Gamut. The two men devise a plan to rescue Uncas, then Hawkeye and Uncas escape into the forest. Chapter 27: The villagers find that Gamut has taken the place of Uncas, and Magua plans to recover Cora from the Delaware village. Chapter 28: Magua contacts members of the Delaware tribe that are holding Cora captive and also asks about Hawkeye and his men. Chapter 29: The prisoners are brought before the entire tribe, and Magua makes plans to leave the village with Cora. Chapter 30: Uncas comes before the Delaware tribe and the warriors attack him. Circumstances change when Tamenund recognizes Uncas. Chapter 31: Uncas and Hawkeye prepare to rescue Cora, and Gamut reveals where Cora is being held prisoner. Chapter 32: A fight between the Huron and the Delaware tribes ensues and Uncas finally reaches Cora, but a tragic confrontation occurs. Chapter 33: There is agonizing news about Cora and Uncas. Hawkeye bids farewell to Gamut, Heyward, Munro, and Alice to be with Chingachgook. The Red Badge of Courage Henry Fleming is youthful, energetic, and patriotic; however, he is also inexperienced. He learns about courage during the Civil War in the heat of battle. Chapter 1: A group of Union soldiers is awaiting the start of battle as rumors are spreading that they will be moving the next day. Chapter 2: The men are wondering where they will be sent as young Henry Fleming thinks about what will happen when the battle begins. Chapter 3: The troops are moved from one position to another which creates feelings of uneasiness and fright among the men. Chapter 4: The men see others moving away from the battle and the veteran soldiers yell at the retreating soldiers. Chapter 5: The battle finally begins. There is much confusion during the fighting, but Henry's regiment drives back the enemy. Chapter 6: The enemy soldiers regroup and again attack Henry and his friends who eventually retreat.
144
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title 4
Chapters 7-8
5
Chapters 9-10
6
Chapters 11-12
7
Chapters 13-14
8
Chapters 15-16
9
Chapters 17-18
10
Chapters 19-20
11
Chapters 21-22
Lesson Content Chapter 7: Henry is embarrassed because he left the battle that his comrades won. He runs into the woods making a horrifying discovery. Chapter 8: Henry hears sounds of battle and moves toward to the sounds. He meets many wounded men who were involved in the fight. Chapter 9: Henry stays with the wounded men and sees his friend Jim Conklin, who is critically wounded. He tries to help him. Chapter 10: Henry grieves when his friend Jim dies, and the tattered soldier now becomes disoriented and confused. Chapter 11: Henry remains in the area to seek news of the battle. He is ashamed for abandoning his troop, and wonders if he should rejoin them. Chapter 12: Retreating soldiers suddenly come running out of the woods. Henry is injured in the confusion, but a man with a cheery voice helps him. Chapter 13: Henry's friends welcome him into the camp. He is treated for his injuries by a soldier named Wilson, who gives his blanket to Henry so he can rest. Chapter 14: The next morning, Henry visits with Wilson and notices that Wilson is no longer loud and arrogant. Chapter 15: Henry and his friends wait for orders. Wilson asks Henry to return the packet of papers he had asked him to hold the day before. Chapter 16: Henry is surprised that his friends do not realize what had actually happened on the previous day. They are ordered back to the woods. Chapter 17: As Henry is getting ready for the battle, he becomes angry with the enemy soldiers. He is praised for his valor when the enemy retreats. Chapter 18: Henry and Wilson overhear that the enemy might overrun the Union line, and many casualties are expected. Chapter 19: Henry is in front leading the troops. He and Wilson grab the flag from the fallen color sergeant. Chapter 20: Henry's regiment mounts another charge when they are hit with tremendous firepower. He is surprised by the actions of the enemy. Chapter 21: For now, the battle is over, with only a small amount of ground gained as a result of the fighting. Chapter 22: The battle begins again. Henry makes a decision about what he will do during the battle, as his regiment is getting weaker.
145
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title 12
Chapters 23-24
Introduction 1
Chapter 1
2
Chapters 2-3
3
Chapters 4-5
4
Chapters 6-7
5
Chapters 8
Lesson Content Chapter 23: When Henry's regiment is ordered to charge, the men move forward to meet the enemy with Henry leading them. The battle ends and prisoners are taken. Chapter 24: Henry's regiment moves back from the battlefield. Henry knows that he has atoned for his actions in the first battle. The House of the Seven Gables The House of the Seven Gables was cursed when it was constructed and had affected generations of the Pyncheon family for 160 years. Chapter 1 - The Old Pyncheon Family: The House of the Seven Gables was a deteriorating old house in a New England town built by Colonel Pyncheon. For generations the Pyncheon family suffered many hardships. Chapter 2 - The Little Shop-Window: Hepzibah Pyncheon was an old maid who lived in seclusion in the house for almost thirty years. She had to open a shop in the house because she needed money. Chapter 3 - The First Customer: Hepzibah's first customer in the shop was Mr. Holgrave, a young man in his early twenties, a daguerreotypist who lived in one of the gables in the house. Chapter 4 - A Day Behind the Counter: Judge Jaffrey Pyncheon, Hepzibah's cousin and the owner of the house, was standing outside the house, which concerned Hepzibah. That night, Phoebe, a distant cousin of the Pyncheon family, arrived at the House of the Seven Gables. Chapter 5 - May and November: Phoebe Pyncheon was a girl of seventeen who had grown up in the country. Hepzibah did not want Phoebe to stay at the house, so she told Phoebe the legend of Colonel Pyncheon and Matthew Maule. Chapter 6 - Maule's Well: Phoebe went out to the garden, which had become overgrown from neglect, and Holgrave came into the garden and talked to her. Chapter 7 - The Guest: The next morning, Phoebe came into the kitchen where Hepzibah was making breakfast. She told Phoebe that Clifford, her brother, was coming to live in the house. Chapter 8 - The Pyncheon of To-day: A little boy named Ned Higgins came into the shop and asked Phoebe about Clifford. Judge Jaffrey Pyncheon also visited the shop and introduced himself to Phoebe. She drew back when the judge tried to kiss her.
146
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title 6
Chapters 9-10
7
Chapters 11-12
8
Chapters 13-14
9
Chapters 15-16
10
Chapters 17-18
Lesson Content Chapter 9 - Clifford and Phoebe: Hepzibah was very happy that Clifford had come to the house, and since Clifford enjoyed being around Phoebe, Hepzibah asked Phoebe to care for Clifford. Chapter 10 - The Pyncheon Garden: Phoebe read books to Clifford in the garden. Holgrave loaned Phoebe some poetry and fiction books. Chapter 11 - The Arched Window: Clifford spent time sitting next to the arched window in front of the house. He longed for the good old days and was sad that stagecoaches were no longer used. Chapter 12 - The Daguerreotypist: Phoebe was able to pursue her own interests when Clifford was asleep. She talked to Holgrave and learned he had held many jobs including schoolmaster, salesman, and newspaper editor. Chapter 13 - Alice Pyncheon: This chapter is a flashback to a time forty years after the construction of the House of the Seven Gables when Gervayse Pyncheon was the occupant of the house. Chapter 14 - Phoebe's Goodbye: Holgrave finished his story about Gervayse and Alice, then Phoebe and Holgrave talked about Hepzibah and Clifford. Chapter 15 - The Scowl and Smile: Both Clifford and Hepzibah missed Phoebe. Hepzibah was losing customers in her shop, so Judge Pyncheon visited the house and offered financial assistance, which Hepzibah refused. Chapter 16 - Clifford's Chamber: Hepzibah had a foreboding that something was going to happen between Clifford and Jaffrey Pyncheon. She went to Clifford's room, but he was not there. She called out for Jaffrey to help her find Clifford and was shocked when she discovered Jaffrey dead in the parlor. Chapter 17 - The Flight of Two Owls: Hepzibah and Clifford made plans to leave the House of the Seven Gables. They went to the train station and boarded a train. Clifford became more outgoing and alert on the train. Chapter 18 - Governor Pyncheon: The body of Judge Pyncheon remained in the House of the Seven Gables. Jaffrey had a busy day planned, including seeing a doctor and meeting with his political supporters to announce that he was going to run for governor.
147
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
11
Chapters 19-21
Lesson Content Chapter 19 - Alice's Posies: Uncle Venner came to the House of the Seven Gables the day after Jaffrey's death. People wondered why the shop wasn't open and why Judge Pyncheon was not keeping his appointments. Chapter 20 - The Flower of Eden: Holgrave told Phoebe of Jaffrey's death and the departure of Hepzibah and Clifford. Holgrave also revealed to Phoebe that he was in love with her. Clifford and Hepzibah then returned from their trip. Chapter 21 - The Departure: The author uses the character Holgrave and the element of flashback to explain the mystery of Clifford's imprisonment. Judge Jaffrey Pyncheon had destroyed the will which left the estate to Clifford, so when he died, the estate went to Clifford and Hepzibah and they became rich. Holgrave reveals his true identity.
148
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-6
2
Chapters 7-11
Lesson Content Jane Eyre In Jane Eyre, Jane searches for independence and acceptance and learns important lessons as she develops into a young woman with a strong sense of compassion and forgiveness. Chapter 1: Jane Eyre is an orphaned child living at Gateshead, the home of her aunt, Mrs. Reed, and is not allowed to play with Mrs. Reed's children. After an argument with her cousin John, Jane is sent to the red-room. Chapter 2: Being sent to the red-room terrifies Jane. She is so frightened by some of the objects in the room that she cries out for help and then faints. Chapter 3: Mr. Lloyd, the apothecary, is called to check on Jane's health. Mr. Lloyd suggests that Jane be sent to a school. Chapter 4: Jane recovers from the experience in the red-room. The Reed family still mistreats Jane, and she learns that she will be attending a school. Chapter 5: Jane travels to the school, Lowood, alone. She is introduced to a kind lady, Miss Temple, and also meets another student named Helen Burns. Helen tells her that Lowood is a charity school. Chapter 6: Jane begins her term at Lowood School. She and Helen share many conversations. Jane does not agree with Helen's philosophy of "always love your enemy" as life is harsh at Lowood. Helen continues to be the object of abuse by Miss Scatcherd. Chapter 7: Mr. Brocklehurst visits Jane's classroom and reprimands Jane in front of the other students for dropping her slate. Chapter 8: Jane feels sorry for herself after being humiliated by Mr. Brocklehurst. Helen is supportive of Jane's problems, and Miss Temple listens to Jane's story. Miss Temple writes to Dr. Lloyd to verify Jane's truthfulness and clears Jane's name of being branded a liar. Chapter 9: Jane is finally enjoying her time at Lowood, but springtime brings an epidemic of typhus to the school afflicting nearly half the students. Helen develops consumption and becomes gravely ill. Chapter 10: The public becomes concerned with the conditions at the school. Many positive changes occur, but Jane has spent eight years at Lowood and now feels she needs a change. She applies for a governess position. Chapter 11: Jane accepts a position at Thornfield as governess to eight-year old Adèle. Jane is informed that Mr. Rochester is her employer and that he travels often.
149
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
3
Chapters 12-16
4
Chapters 17-19
5
Chapters 20-23
Lesson Content Chapter 12: Jane is happy living at Thornfield and has a positive relationship with Adèle. Jane witnesses a horse slipping on an icy spot and assists the rider. She later finds out that it was Mr. Rochester, her employer. Chapter 13: Mr. Rochester, Adèle, Mrs. Fairfax, and Jane have dinner together. Mr. Rochester is impatient with Jane but is impressed with her paintings. Chapter 14: When Mr. Rochester returns from his long trips, he gives Adèle gifts. He and Jane have a candid and pleasant discussion about a variety of topics. Chapter 15: Upon learning more about Adèle's background, Jane understands her better. Jane hears strange laughter outside her door and sees smoke coming from Mr. Rochester's room, and he asks Jane to keep it a secret. Chapter 16: Mr. Rochester offers an explanation for the cause of the fire and then leaves Thornfield for a social engagement that Blanche Ingram will also be attending. Chapter 17: Mr. Rochester is returning to Thornfield with a group of guests, and Jane finally meets Blanche Ingram. Jane acknowledges her growing affection for Mr. Rochester. Chapter 18: The guests at Thornfield play charades. Jane considers her feelings for Mr. Rochester. A man from the West Indies, Richard Mason, arrives at Thornfield looking for Mr. Rochester. Chapter 19: A gypsy fortune teller, Mother Bunches, arrives at Thornfield to tell fortunes, and Jane is told about her future. Chapter 20: Jane and the guests hear a loud cry from the upstairs of the house. Mr. Rochester reassures the guests, sends them back to bed, and asks Jane for her help. Chapter 21: Jane returns to Gateshead to visit with the ailing Mrs. Reed, who gives Jane a letter from her Uncle John Eyer that she has kept secret for three years. Chapter 22: Mrs. Reed passes away, and Jane stays with her cousins for a while after the funeral. She returns to Thornfield expecting wedding preparations for Mr. Rochester and Blanche Ingram. Chapter 23: Jane and Mr. Rochester visit in the garden at Thornfield, and Mr. Rochester teasingly tells Jane she must leave Thornfield. He then surprises Jane by revealing his feelings for her.
150
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
6
Chapters 24-26
7
Chapters 27-30
8
Chapters 31-34
Lesson Content Chapter 24: Mr. Rochester and Jane are to be married in one month, but Mrs. Fairfax is not excited about the proposal. Jane informs Mr. Rochester that she will continue to tutor Adèle. Chapter 25: The time for the wedding has arrived. Jane tells Mr. Rochester of a frightening dream and occurrence that she experienced the night before. Mr. Rochester tries to calm her fears. Chapter 26: Jane and Mr. Rochester go to the church for their wedding, but a stranger speaks out during the ceremony with information that prevents the marriage from taking place. Mr. Rochester takes Jane and the others back to Thornfield to reveal an unusual secret. Chapter 27: Jane is confused by the events of the day, so Mr. Rochester tells her about his past. He still professes his love for her, but Jane makes the decision to leave Thornfield. Chapter 28: Jane travels by coach to a place called Whitcross. She accidentally leaves her parcel on the coach and now has no money. She is forced to beg for food, and the Rivers family takes her in. Chapter 29: Jane is exhausted from her travels and has spent three days with the Rivers family. She wants to stay at the Rivers' home until she can find work. Chapter 30: Jane becomes friends with Diana and Mary Rivers who are also governesses and will soon be returning to their positions. St. John offers Jane a position directing a charity school called Morton. Chapter 31: Jane begins her job as headmistress of Morton and moves into the school cottage. She then meets a beautiful woman named Rosamond Oliver. Chapter 32: Jane is happier in her new position and is well liked and accepted by the community, but she is puzzled by St. John's reaction to a portrait she is painting of Rosamond Oliver. Chapter 33: Later, St. John returns and reveals to Jane that he knows about her past and tells her of her Uncle John Eyer's death and the news of her inheritance. Chapter 34: Jane waits for Mary and Diana Rivers to arrive at Moor House. St. John asks Jane to go on a mission to India with him. She is confused by St. John's peculiar offer.
151
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
9
Chapters 35-38
Introduction 1
Act I, Scenes 1-7
2
Act II, Scenes 1-4
3
Act III, Scenes 1-6
4
Act IV, Scenes 1-3
5
Act V, Scenes 1-8
Introduction
Lesson Content Chapter 35: St. John waits for Jane's decision. He has become very cold and controlling. Jane suddenly thinks she hears the voice of Mr. Rochester calling her name. Chapter 36: Jane returns to Thornfield after being gone for a year and is shocked by what she finds when she arrives. She goes to a nearby inn to inquire about what happened at Thornfield and to the whereabouts of Mr. Rochester. Chapter 37: Jane goes to Ferndean where Mr. Rochester is living and surprises Mr. Rochester by serving his tea. Once again, Mr. Rochester asks Jane to marry him. Chapter 38: Jane and Mr. Rochester marry in a quiet ceremony, and Adèle is moved to a closer school. Jane is very happy with her life and the decisions she has made. Macbeth Macbeth is a play that shows how the lust for power leads to destruction as Macbeth's greed corrupts his spirit and creates a negative outlook on life. Three witches visit Macbeth and Banquo on the battlefield telling them of their futures. Lady Macbeth creates a plot to kill King Duncan. Macduff and Lennox arrive at the castle to discover King Duncan has been murdered. Macbeth appears very upset about what has happened. Banquo suspects Macbeth for the murder of King Duncan, so Macbeth arranges for the murder of Banquo and his son. Macbeth is visited by a ghost. Once again, Macbeth meets with the witches and seeks reassurance for his future. He learns that Macduff has gone to England, which angers him. Lady Macbeth has gone mad with guilt, and Macbeth believes he cannot be killed because of the witches' prophecy. Wuthering Heights As a result of his childhood experiences, Heathcliff puts revenge into action and makes life miserable for those he hates in Wuthering Heights.
152
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Study: EB Learning Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Essay: Narrative
Material Material Material Material Material
Study: EB Learning Material
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
1
Chapters 1-6
2
Chapters 7-10
Lesson Content Chapter 1: Mr. Lockwood meets with Heathcliff, his new landlord. Mr. Lockwood is concerned for his safety at Heathcliff's home, Wuthering Heights, after being left in a room with ferocious dogs. Chapter 2: The next day, Mr. Lockwood makes another visit to Wuthering Heights. A blizzard occurs and he asks for directions on how to return home but is refused assistance. He is forced to spend the night at Wuthering Heights. Chapter 3: Lockwood has nightmares and refuses to stay in the room for fear it is haunted. Chapter 4: Lockwood asks his housekeeper, Nelly, about the history of Wuthering Heights. She tells about former owners, the Earnshaw family. Chapter 5: Heathcliff is adopted by the Earnshaws. Hindley Earnshaw is sent away to school. Mr. Earnshaw becomes ill and later dies. Catherine Earnshaw and Heathcliff mourn his loss and Hindley returns home. Chapter 6: Hindley takes over the household and forces Heathcliff to work in the fields. Heathcliff and Catherine run off to play. Heathcliff explains to Nelly that Catherine was bitten by the Lintons' dog and was carried into their house by a servant. Chapter 7: Catherine stays at Thrushcross Grange for five weeks. When she returns home, she is rude to Heathcliff and embarrasses him. The Linton family is invited to Wuthering Heights for dinner. Heathcliff is locked in the attic. Chapter 8: Hindley's wife gives birth to a son, Hareton, and she dies shortly after. Heathcliff grows jealous about Catherine's relationship with Edgar Linton and confronts her about it. Chapter 9: Catherine tells Nelly that she and Edgar are engaged and admits to loving Heathcliff but says she could never marry him. Heathcliff overhears this and leaves Wuthering Heights. Chapter 10: Heathcliff returns to Wuthering Heights shortly after Catherine's marriage and visits the Lintons, where Isabella develops an interest in him.
153
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
3
Chapters 11-15
4
Chapters 16-20
5
Chapters 21-24
Lesson Content Chapter 11: Catherine confronts Heathcliff about his feelings for Isabella. She locks herself in a room and refuses to eat after Edgar tells her that she must choose between him and Heathcliff. Chapter 12: Catherine becomes delirious and is upset that Edgar has not come in to ask for her forgiveness. Isabella and Heathcliff elope. Chapter 13: Catherine is still weak and feverish and learns that she is pregnant. Isabella regrets her decision to marry Heathcliff. Chapter 14: Nelly goes to Wuthering Heights. Heathcliff asks about Catherine and threatens to hold Nelly captive until she agrees to help him. Chapter 15: Catherine, who is still very ill, and Heathcliff finally meet with each other. Catherine collapses after a heated discussion. Chapter 16: Catherine gives birth to a daughter, also named Catherine, and the mother dies shortly after. Nelly tells Heathcliff the sad news. Chapter 17: Isabella goes to London and gives birth to a son who she names Linton. Hindley dies six months later. Chapter 18: Edgar raises his daughter Cathy and does not allow her to explore the surrounding area, but when he is gone to London to visit Isabella Cathy wanders to Wuthering Heights. Chapter 19: Edgar returns home from London after Isabella dies and brings twelve-year-old Linton with him. Heathcliff now wants custody of his son. Chapter 20: Nelly brings Linton to Wuthering Heights, and Heathcliff meets his son for the first time. Chapter 21: Cathy and Nelly visit Linton at Wuthering Heights. Cathy is quite taken with Linton but is unkind to Hareton. Edgar forbids Cathy to see Linton again, but they continue to correspond through letters. Chapter 22: Edgar is sick most of the following winter, and Cathy's correspondence with Linton has ceased. Heathcliff makes her feel guilty so she visits Linton. Chapter 23: Linton tries to coax Cathy into marrying him, which aggravates her into shoving his chair. He develops a coughing fit. Nelly catches a cold and Cathy must now care for her and Edgar during the day. At night, she sneeks out to see Linton at Wuthuring Heights. Chapter 24: Edgar forbids Cathy from returning to Wuthering Heights, but Linton can visit Cathy at Thrushcross Grange.
154
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
6
Chapters 25-29
7
Chapters 30-34
Introduction
Lesson Content Chapter 25: Catherine obeys her father and does not visit Linton. Due to Linton's failing health, Edgar considers letting Cathy marry Linton and arrangements are made for Cathy and Linton to meet on the moors. Chapter 26: Nelly and Cathy have to assist Linton because of his weak physical condition, and they agree to meet again the next Thursday. Chapter 27: Cathy and Nelly go to visit Linton in the moors. Heathcliff convinces them to come to Wuthering Heights and locks them in the house. Chapter 28: Cathy and Linton are now married, and Linton is proud that he will soon claim Cathy's inheritance. Cathy visits Edgar who is on his deathbed. Chapter 29: Heathcliff forces Cathy to return to Wuthering Heights and tells Nelly some disturbing information about Edgar's burial. Chapter 30: Cathy cares for Linton until his death and remains distant from Hareton. Nelly wants to help Cathy leave Wuthering Heights. Chapter 31: Mr. Lockwood goes to Wuthering Heights to tell Heathcliff that he is moving out and returning to London. He slips a note to Cathy from Nelly. Chapter 32: After six months, Lockwood returns to Thrushcross Grange on a hunting trip and learns that Nelly has moved to Wuthering Heights. Chapter 33: Cathy and Heathcliff have an argument and he nearly strikes her. Chapter 34: Heathcliff dies, which gives Cathy control of both Wuthering Heights and Thrushcross Grange, and Hareton and Cathy have grown closer. Lockwood leaves. Pride and Prejudice The two main characters in Pride and Prejudice, Elizabeth Bennet and Fitzwilliam Darcy, are introduced to each other at a ball in Meryton. Their first impressions of each other are not favorable.
155
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
1
Volume I Chapters 1-14
Lesson Content Chapter 1: The Bennet family members are discussing the expected arrival of Mr. Bingley, a wealthy man who will live at a neighboring estate. Chapter 2: Mrs. Bennet does not know that Mr. Bennet has already visited Mr. Bingley. Mrs. Bennet and the girls have many questions about Mr. Bingley. Chapter 3: Mrs. Bennet and the girls meet Mr. Bingley and his friend, Mr. Darcy, at a ball in Meryton. Mr. Bingley makes a good impression on the Bennet family women, while Mr. Darcy is considered to be quite arrogant. Chapter 4: Jane tells Elizabeth that she likes Mr. Bingley. Elizabeth agrees that Mr. Bingley is friendly, but she does not approve of his sisters' behavior. Chapter 5: The Lucas family lives near Longbourn. Charlotte Lucas and her mother visit the Bennet family the day after the ball in Meryton. Chapter 6: Jane and Elizabeth visit with Mr. Bingley and his sisters. Mr. Darcy, who is staying with the Bingleys, is attracted to Elizabeth. Elizabeth is not attracted to him. Chapter 7: The Bingleys invite Jane to dinner at their estate. Jane is caught in a rainstorm and becomes ill and must stay at the Bingley's home. Elizabeth visits Jane at the Bingley's home. Chapter 8: The Bingley sisters harshly criticize Elizabeth and her family because of their social position. This does not bother Mr. Bingley, but Mr. Darcy considers it to be a problem. Chapter 9: Mrs. Bennet visits Jane and Elizabeth at Netherfield, the Bingley home, and Elizabeth is embarrassed by her mother's behavior. Chapter 10: Elizabeth visits with the Bingleys and Mr. Darcy in the drawing room and notices that Mr. Darcy is continually staring at her. She believes Mr. Darcy disapproves of her and her family. Chapter 11: Jane joins the others in the drawing room after dinner. Elizabeth is pleased by the attention Mr. Bingley pays to Jane. Chapter 12: Elizabeth and Jane return to their home at Longbourn. Mr. Bingley is sad to see them go, but. Mr. Darcy and the Bingley sisters are glad. Chapter 13: Mr. Bennet tells his family that his cousin, Mr. Collins, is coming to visit Longbourn. Mr. Collins will eventually inherit Longbourn. Chapter 14: Mr. Bennet asks Mr. Collins to tell the family of his wealthy patroness, Lady Catherine de Bourgh. Mr. Bennet thinks Mr. Collins is a fool.
156
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
2
Volume I Chapters 15-23
Lesson Content Chapter 15: Mr. Collins announces that he is interested in marrying one of the Bennet girls. The Bennet ladies and Mr. Collins go for a walk and meet two soldiers, Mr. Wickham and Mr. Denny. Chapter 16: Elizabeth visits with Mr. Wickham and is impressed with the young soldier but wonders about the animosity between Mr. Darcy and Mr. Wickham. Chapter 17: Elizabeth tells Jane about her conversation with Mr. Wickham. Mr. Bingley announces that there will be a ball at his home, Netherfield. Chapter 18: The Bennet family attends the ball at Netherfield. Elizabeth, disappointed that Mr. Wickham is not present, reluctantly dances with Mr. Collins. Chapter 19: Mr. Collins proposes to Elizabeth, and she adamantly declines his offer of marriage. Mr. Collins does not believe her refusal is sincere. Chapter 20: Mrs. Bennet asks her husband to talk to Elizabeth about Mr. Collins' proposal, and he tells Elizabeth that she has made the right choice. Charlotte comes to visit and meets Mr. Collins. Chapter 21: Jane receives a note stating the Bingley family is leaving Netherfield to go to London and that Mr. Bingley will marry Georgiana Darcy. Chapter 22: Mr. Collins asks Charlotte Lucas to marry him. Chapter 23: Sir William Lucas arrives at Longbourn announcing the wedding plans to the Bennet family. The announcement affects Elizabeth's and Charlotte's friendship.
157
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
3
Volume II Chapters 1-10
Lesson Content Chapter 1: Miss Bingley sends Jane a letter stating that the Bingleys will not return to Netherfield until the end of the winter. Jane and Elizabeth talk about Mr. Bingley and Mr. Darcy. Chapter 2: Mrs. Bennet's brother and his wife, Mr. and Mrs. Gardiner, arrive at Longbourn for a visit and offer to take Jane to London. Chapter 3: Mrs. Gardiner warns Elizabeth not to get involved with Wickham. Mr. Collins returns for his wedding, and Charlotte invites Elizabeth to visit them at Hunsford. Chapter 4: Elizabeth accompanies William Lucas on a trip to Hunsford where Charlotte and Mr. Collins live. They stop in London to visit Jane and the Gardiners. Chapter 5: Sir William, his daughter Maria, and Elizabeth arrive at Hunsford. Miss de Bourgh invites everyone to dinner at Rosings the following day. Chapter 6: Mr. Collins describes the grandeur of the estate at Rosings, but Elizabeth is unimpressed by Mr. Collins' descriptions. Chapter 7: Elizabeth stays at Hunsford after the departure of Sir William and Maria and learns that Mr. Darcy and his cousin, Colonel Fitzwilliam, will be visiting Rosings. Chapter 8: Colonel Fitzwilliam and Elizabeth visit with each other following dinner at Rosings, but Lady Catherine de Bourgh interrupts their conversation. Chapter 9: Mr. Darcy comes to Hunsford to visit Elizabeth. They discuss the departure of the Bingleys and Mr. Darcy the previous November. Chapter 10: Elizabeth meets Colonel Fitzwilliam while she is on a walk. He tells her Mr. Darcy recently saved Mr. Bingley from an ill-advised marriage. Elizabeth becomes ill over the news.
158
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
4
Volume II Chapters 11-19
Lesson Content Chapter 11: Mr. Darcy tells Elizabeth he is in love with her and asks her to marry him, but she refuses due to his attitude toward her family. Chapter 12: Mr. Darcy finds Elizabeth while she is out on a walk and hands her a letter describing his reasons for stopping the marriage of Jane to Mr. Bingley. It also describes the relationship between Mr. Darcy and Mr. Wickham. Chapter 13: Elizabeth reads the letter and at first does not believe Mr. Darcy's account of Mr. Bingley and Jane and is confused about Mr. Wickham. Chapter 14: Lady Catherine invites Elizabeth, Maria, and the Collins to dinner. Lady Catherine asks Elizabeth and Maria to stay another two weeks, but Elizabeth tells Lady Catherine that her father wants her to return home. Chapter 15: Elizabeth and Maria stop at the Gardiner home for a few days on their trip home. Jane plans to join them. Chapter 16: Elizabeth is glad the soldiers will soon be leaving Meryton, but Kitty and Lydia hope to vacation in Brighton to be near the soldiers. Chapter 17: Elizabeth tells Jane about Mr. Darcy's marriage proposal and Mr. Wickham. They decide not to reveal the contents of the letter. Elizabeth does not tell Jane about the information in the letter concerning Mr. Bingley. Chapter 18: Mrs. Forster, the wife of the colonel of the regiment, asks Lydia to go with her to Brighton, and Elizabeth urges her father not to allow Lydia to go. Chapter 19: The relationship between Mr. Bennet and Mrs. Bennet is described in this chapter. Elizabeth goes on a vacation with Mr. and Mrs. Gardiner.
159
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
5
Volume III Chapters 1-10
Lesson Content Chapter 1: Elizabeth and the Gardiners visit Pemberley, Mr. Darcy's estate. Both Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy are uncomfortable in each other's company. Chapter 2: Elizabeth meets Mr. Darcy's sister. Mr. and Mrs. Gardiner believe Mr. Darcy is in love with Elizabeth. Chapter 3: Mr. Darcy's sister Georgiana approves of Elizabeth, but Miss Bingley tells both Mr. Darcy and Georgiana that she does not like Elizabeth. Chapter 4: Jane sends two letters to Elizabeth telling her that Lydia has eloped with Wickham. They are believed to be in London. Elizabeth asks Mr. Gardiner to help her look for her sister. Chapter 5: The Gardiners and Elizabeth arrive at Longbourn. Elizabeth regrets not revealing what she knew of Wickham's character. Chapter 6: The Bennet family is disgraced over the actions of Lydia, and Mr. Bennet returns home. Chapter 7: Mr. Gardiner finds Wickham and Lydia. Wickham wants money from Mr. Bennet before he will marry Lydia. Chapter 8: Mr. Bennet suspects that Mr. Gardiner paid Wickham so he would agree to marry Lydia and announces that he will not welcome the couple. Chapter 9: Lydia and Wickham arrive at Longbourn, and Lydia is not ashamed of what she has done to the reputation of the Bennet family. Lydia tells Elizabeth that Mr. Darcy attended the wedding. Elizabeth writes a letter to Mrs. Gardiner asking for more details concerning Mr. Darcy's role in the wedding. Chapter 10: Mrs. Gardiner sends a letter. Elizabeth now realizes that Mr. Darcy was responsible for arranging the wedding of Lydia and Wickham. Elizabeth alludes to Wickham that she is aware of his past dealings with Mr. Darcy but is careful to not provoke him.
160
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
English Literature XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
6
Volume III Chapters 11-19
1
Gulliver's Travels: A Voyage to Lilliput
2
The Adventure of the Speckled Band
Lesson Content Chapter 11: Lydia and Wickham leave for Newcastle, where the new regiment is stationed. Mrs. Bennet invites both Mr. Bingley and Mr. Darcy to dinner. Chapter 12: Elizabeth observes Jane and Mr. Bingley at the dinner party. She is convinced that Mr. Bingley is still interested in a relationship with Jane. Mr. Darcy leaves for London. Chapter 13: Mr. Bingley is invited to dinner at Longbourn, and Mr. Bingley talks to Mr. Bennet about his intentions toward Jane. Chapter 14: Lady Catherine makes a visit to Longbourn the next morning and tries to discourage Elizabeth against becoming involved with Mr. Darcy. Elizabeth refuses to listen. Chapter 15: Mr. Bennet talks to Elizabeth and tells her that Mr. Collins sent him a letter concerning Mr. Darcy. Chapter 16: Mr. Bingley and Mr. Darcy come to Longbourn to visit, and Mr. Darcy proposes to Elizabeth. Chapter 17: Elizabeth tells Jane about her engagement to Mr. Darcy, and Mrs. Bennet is happily preparing for another wedding. Chapter 18: Lady Catherine is very angry that Mr. Darcy and Elizabeth are going to be married, but the marriage takes place and the couple moves to Pemberly. Chapter 19: Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy settle in at Pemberly after their marriage, and Jane and Mr. Bingley move to Derbyshire, which is near Pemberly. The Bennet sisters remain in close contact. Lydia and Wickham experience financial trouble and seek assistance from Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy. Short Stories A medical doctor named Lemuel Gulliver is shipwrecked and awakens on the shore in the land of Lilliput. Here he meets a race of miniature people who are only six inches tall. Gulliver has many adventures as he becomes involved in the everyday lives of the Lilliputians. Helen Stoner contacts the famous detective Sherlock Holmes, recalling to him the mysterious death of her twin sister several years before. Helen does not trust her stepfather and is fearful for her own life.
161
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Essay: Persuasive
Essay: Persuasive
English Skills IX - XII Grade Levels 9 - 12 A+LS English Skills IX - XII introduces students a variety of topics including: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
common expressions clauses and phrases vowel sounds and spellings story details and sequences folklore inferences parts of speech clauses and diagramming blends and silent letters infinitives digraphs etymology genres and literature farce and satire literary devices propaganda and bias infinitives and clauses root words verbals syllables and pronunciations words in context reading strategies characterization classifying information
162
English Skills IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title
1
Reading Alphabetization
2
Reading - Analogies
3
Reading - Antonyms
4
Reading - Common Expressions
5 6
Reading Connotation and Denotation Reading - Greek and Latin Words
7
Reading - Greek Literature
8
Reading Homonyms and Homophones
9
Reading - Language Arts Terms 1
Lesson Content Reading Skills Use of a dictionary to alphabetize words, importance of alphabetizing in the card catalog: alphabetizing by title, author, and subject; telephone directories, encyclopedia, thesaurus, atlases, periodicals, alphabetizing in bibliographies Definition of an analogy, students practice completing analogies, strategies for recognizing analogous relationships: (specific to general, synonyms, antonyms, cause and effect, part to whole, item to category, time to process, object to action, object to function, part to whole, performer to action) Improving vocabulary through the use of antonyms, identifying antonyms in a dictionary or thesaurus Everyday sayings, idioms, common expressions, euphemisms, implied meanings, clichés, folklore: (epic, folktales, fables, fairy tales, myths, parables, tall tales) Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning, using a dictionary and thesaurus to choose the correct word definition and use Examples and definitions of words with Greek and Latin derivatives, using prefixes and suffixes to form words Greek literature: lyric and epic poetry, drama, philosophy, histories, Homer: (Iliad, Odyssey), Hesiod, didactic, epic, melic, elegiac, iambic, choral poetry, hexameter, pentameter, Golden Age, Athens, Aeschylus, Sophocles, Oedipus, Euripides, Drama, Dionysus, Old Comedy, Middle Comedy, New Comedy, Menander, prose, Sophists, Socrates, Plato, Aristotle, Macedonia, Phillip II, Alexander the Great, Hellenistic Age, Epicurus, pastoral poetry, Polybius, Greco-Roman Age, Neoplatonic School of philosophy
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Paragraph Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Short Answer Essay: Short Answer Essay: Illustration Essay: Short Answer Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Recognizing the correct use of homonyms and homophones
Essay: Short Answer
Allegory, alliteration, allusion, description, epic, irony: (dramatic irony, irony of situation, verbal irony) metaphor, paradox, personification, rhyme, rhyme scheme, satire, simile, stanza: (couplet, tercet, quatrain, cinquain, sestet, heptastich, octave), symbols and symbolism, verse
Study: EB Learning Material
163
English Skills IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title 10
11 12
Reading - Language Arts Terms 2 Reading - Multiple Meaning Words Reading ParaphrasingSummarizing
13
Reading - Poetry
14
Reading - Purpose in Writing
15
Reading - Reading Strategies
16
Reading - Story Details & Sequence
Lesson Content Antagonist, character, characterization, dialogue, flashback, foreshadowing, imagery, mood, plot: (exposition, inciting incident, central conflict, climax, resolution, rising action, denouement, falling action) point of view: (first person, third person, omniscient, limited), protagonist, sequence of events, setting, soliloquy, theme, tone Using a dictionary to identify the multiple meanings of words Direct quotations, paraphrasing, summarizing, plagiarizing, examples of paraphrasing and summarizing, the SQ3R method for learning new material (survey, question, read, recite, review) Poetry definition, imagery, figurative language, rhyme, lines, stanzas, basic forms of poetry: (ballad, sonnet, lyric, narrative, limerick), Shakespearean sonnet, line break, setting, theme Writing process, points to consider when selecting an audience, writing: (narrative, persuasive, descriptive, expository), transitional words: (further information, directional change, sequence and order, explanation, emphasis, location and setting, compare and contrast, summary and conclusion, time), order: (spatial order, chronological order, order of importance, logical order), point of view Answer who, what, when, where, why, and how questions in a reading selection; increase reading comprehension through the use and examination of the following: (vocabulary words, pronouns, cause and effect, story sequence, compare and contrast, author's tone, predicting outcomes); transitional words: (further information, directional change, sequence and order, explanation, emphasis, location and setting, compare and contrast, summary and conclusion, time) Writing style: (word choice, tone, degree of formality, figurative language, rhythm, grammatical structure, sentence length, organization), story elements: (characterization, setting, plot, conflict, point of view), conflict: (man versus man, character versus self, man versus nature, man versus society, man versus fate or destiny), recall details from stories, put story parts in order or sequence, using visualization, story pattern, chronology, flashback and foreshadowing, plot routes, the SWBS technique, transitional words: (further information, directional change, sequence and order, explanation, emphasis, location and setting, compare and contrast, summary and conclusion, time)
164
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Answer Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Short Report Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative
English Skills IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title 17
Reading - Synonyms
18
Reading - Word Recognition
19
Usage Abbreviations
20
Usage - Appositives
21
Usage Capitalization
22
Usage - Clauses
23
Usage - Compound Words
24
Usage - Nouns
25
Usage - Parts of Speech
26
Usage - Phrases
27
Usage - Pronouns
Lesson Content Improving vocabulary through the use of synonyms, identifying synonyms in a dictionary or thesaurus Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context, prefixes, suffixes, and roots to identify unknown words Usage Skills Identify and correctly use abbreviations for states, countries, addresses, measurement, months, days of the week, time, titles, government departments and offices, organizations Definition and use of appositives and appositive phrases, punctuation with appositives Rules for capitalizing names, dates, geographic names, government departments and offices, organizations, seasons, days of the week, months, holidays, title or rank, historic events, historic periods, historic documents, geographic directions, planets, proper adjectives Definition and use of independent and subordinate (dependent) clauses, relative pronouns, clauses that act as adjectives Definition and examples of compound words, students identify compound words, hyphenated compound words, compound nouns, compound personal pronouns, unjoined compound words, gerunds Parts of speech: (noun, pronoun, verb, adjective, adverb, preposition, conjunction, interjection), definition and use of nouns, common and proper nouns, concrete and abstract nouns Definition and use of prepositions and direct objects, prepositional phrases, compound prepositions, objective case pronouns, conjunctions: (coordinating, correlative conjunctions), use of interjections Definition of a phrase, types of phrases: (verb, noun, prepositional, adjective, adverb), object of the preposition, modifiers Definition of a pronoun, pronoun types: (personal, relative, interrogative, demonstrative, indefinite), antecedents and personal pronouns, singular and plural pronouns, first, second and third person pronouns, pronoun cases: (nominative, objective, possessive), pronoun genders: (masculine, feminine, neutral), reflexive pronouns
165
Essays & Media Essay: Paragraph Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Short Answer Essay: Paragraph Essay: Paragraph Essay: Short Answer Essay: Descriptive Essay: Paragraph Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
English Skills IX Grade Level 9 Lesson Title 28
Usage - Punctuation 1
29
Usage - Punctuation 2
30
Usage - Sentence Construction
31
Usage Problems
32
Usage - Verbs 1
33
Usage - Verbs 2
34
Usage - Writing Process Overview
35 36 37 38 39 40
Vocab - Final Consonant Blends Vocab - Initial Blends Vocab - Short Vowel Review Vocab - Silent Letters Vocab - Spelling Review Vocab - Vowel Diphthong Review
Lesson Content Use of end marks in sentences: (period, question mark, exclamation point), use of punctuation: (to enclose, to link, to show omission, to separate), sentence types: (declarative sentence, imperative, exclamatory, interrogative), use of periods in abbreviations Use of a comma in a compound sentence, commas used with other punctuation; use of a comma to separate introductory words, transitional words, introductory participial phrases, long introductory prepositional phrases, introductory adverb clauses Definition of a sentence; fragment; run-on; declarative, interrogative, exclamatory, and imperative sentences Correct use of subject verb agreement, phrases: (verb, prepositional, adjective), pronouns, collective nouns, use of singular and plural, review of most grammar rules Definition and use of verbs, action verbs: (physical action, mental action), transitive verbs, intransitive verbs, and linking verbs Verb tenses, regular and irregular verbs, action verbs, linking verbs, helping verbs, verb phrases, transitive and intransitive verbs, main verbs Overview of the writing process, writing activity, prewriting, clustering, brainstorming, five senses chart, six big questions, free writing, looping, chronological order, spatial order, order of importance, transitional words: (further information, directional change, sequence and order, explanation, emphasis, location, compare and contrast, summary and conclusion, time) Vocabulary Skills Review of ending blends /ld/, /lt/, /nd/, /nt/, /ry/, /ty/, and /nk/; students complete words with the correct consonant blend Definition and review of consonant blends using /bl/, /br/, /cl/, /cr/, /dr/, /fl/, /fr/, /gl/, /gr/, /pl/, and /pr/ Students identify short vowel sounds
Essays & Media Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph Essay: Narrative Essay: Descriptive Essay: Short Answer Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Paragraph Essay: Paragraph
Introduction of words that use silent letters /kn/, /wr/, and /gn/; students complete words with the correct sounds Using a dictionary, adding suffixes to words, understanding changes with plurals, verbs, vowel sounds, syllabification as a spelling aid, spelling guidelines Diphthongs that use the letters /ou/, /oi/, and /ow/; students complete words using correct vowel combinations
166
Essay: Short Answer Study: EB Learning Material
English Skills X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
1
Reading - Analogies
2
Reading - Antonyms
3
Reading - Dictionary
4
Reading - Fact and Opinion
5
Reading - Folklore
6
Reading - Language Arts Terms 1
7
Reading - Language Arts Terms 2
8 9
Reading - Latin and Greek Roots 1 Reading - Latin and Greek Roots 2
Lesson Content Reading Skills Definition of analogies, students practice completing analogies, strategies for recognizing analogous relationships including the following: compare and contrast, synonyms, antonyms, cause and effect, part to whole, character to member, time to process, object to characteristic, worker to tool, product to worker Definition of antonyms; students practice finding antonyms for words; using the thesaurus as a source for antonyms How to use a dictionary, parts of the dictionary and dictionary entry, syllabication, pronunciation, superscript numbers, word forms, parts of speech, definitions, thesaurus, guide words, reference materials Identify facts, opinions and sense words, choose significant details which do or do not support the main idea, identify information which gives support for opinions, using judgment, appealing to emotions; logic, loaded words, literature: (poems, short stories, novels, essays, plays), transitional words, order: (spatial order, chronological order, order of importance, logical order), writing: (narrative, persuasive, descriptive, expository), drawing conclusions Folklore, definition and examples of fable, folktales, tall tale, myth, fantasy, parable, heroes, proverb, fairy tale, symbolism, Greek gods and goddesses (Zeus, Hera, Poseidon, Hestia), epic, Homer, Iliad, and Odyssey Definition of literary terms: autobiography, ballad, biography, fiction, nonfiction, fantasy, fable, tall tale, myth, tragedy, genre, parable, literary style, motif, persona, epiphany, figures of speech, literal language, figurative language Definition of poetry terms: anapest, blank verse, caesura, couplet, dactyl, foot, iamb, meter, monologue, poetry, prosody, pyrrhic, refrain, repetition, rhythm, scansion, sonnet, spondee, trochee, terza rima, versification Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
167
Essays & Media
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Narrative Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Short Answer
English Skills X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
10
Reading - Latin Literature
11
Reading - Main Idea
12 13
Reading - Making Inferences Reading - Multiple Meaning Words
14
Reading - Poetry
15
Reading - Prefixes
16
Reading - Story Elements
17
Reading - Suffixes
18
Reading - Synonyms
19
Reading - Words in Context
Lesson Content Roman Empire, Latins, Etruscans, Roman Republic, Greco-Roman Age, Plutarch, Lucian, Stoicism, Epictetus, Ptolemy, Galen, Latin literature: (Early Period, Golden Age, Age of Cicero, Augustan Age, Silver Age), Livius Andronicus, Gnaeus Naevius, Latin tragedies, Quintus Ennius, Latin comedies, Plautus, Golden Age of Roman Literature, Cicero, orations, Julius Caesar, Sallust, Catullus, Lucretius, Varro, Epicurus, Zeno, Virgil, Aeneid, Horace, elegiac poetry, Pliny the Elder, fall of Rome Identify main idea and details, recognize the title as a source of the main idea, determine the key words and topic sentence, supporting sentences including anecdotes, facts, and statistics, clincher sentences, theme, fiction, historical fiction, nonfiction Make an inference based on feelings and motives, mannerism, definitions and examples of feelings and motives, drawing conclusions, characterization Using a dictionary to identify the multiple meanings of words, parts of speech, thesaurus Types of poetry: (lyric, dramatic, narrative), stanza: (couplet, tercet, quatrain, cinquain, sestet, heptastich, octave), theme, rhyme, rhyme scheme, figurative language: (personification, simile, metaphor), imagery, sonnet: (Elizabethan, Shakespearean, English), iambic pentameter, rhythm, heroic couplet, haiku, dramatic monologue, narrative poetry, ballad, epic, in media res, metrical romances, concrete poem, diamante poem Using prefixes from the Greek, French, and Latin languages to determine word meaning, suffixes, and roots; using a dictionary to determine word origin (etymology) Narrative writing: (creative nonfiction, historical fiction, nonfiction), characterization, plot, setting, point of view, fiction, nonfiction, historical fiction, creative fiction, autobiography, biography, conflict, novella, novel, short story Using suffixes from the Greek, French, and Latin languages to determine word meaning, prefixes, roots, suffixes that create nouns and adjectives Definition and identification of synonyms; sources: dictionary and thesaurus; examples of synonyms Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning, using a dictionary and thesaurus to choose the correct word definition, euphemisms
168
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Compare and Contrast
Essay: Short Answer Essay: Paragraph Essay: Paragraph
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Essay: Short Answer Study: EB Learning Material CV Video Essay: Short Answer Essay: Paragraph Essay: Paragraph Essay: Persuasive
English Skills X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title
20
Usage - Adjectives
21
Usage Capitalization
22
Usage - Clauses
23
Usage - Nouns
24
Usage - Parts of a Sentence
25
Usage - Parts of Speech
26 27 28 29
Usage - Pronouns Usage - Punctuation 1 Usage - Punctuation 2 Usage - Usage Problems
30
Usage - Verbals 1
31
Usage - Verbals 2
32
Usage - Verbs 1
33
Usage - Verbs 2
Lesson Content Usage Skills Definition and use of adjectives, articles, proper adjectives and predicates, demonstrative adjectives, interrogative pronouns as adjectives, indefinite pronouns as adjectives, possessive nouns, common and proper nouns Capitalization of proper nouns and proper adjectives, review of rules for capitalizing names, titles, locations, historical events, historic periods, movements, documents, special events, days of the week, months, holidays, buildings, monuments, awards, ships, planets and other heavenly bodies Definition and use of adjective and adverb clauses, noun clauses, subjects, direct objects, predicate nominatives, indirect objects, appositives, objects of prepositions, prepositional phrases, clauses: (independent, subordinate, dependent); sentence structure: (simple, compound, complex, compoundcomplex) Common and proper nouns, collective and compound nouns, concrete and abstract nouns, one word, two word, and hyphenated words Identify the simple and complete subject in a sentence Parts of speech: (noun, pronoun, adjective, verb, adverb, preposition, conjunction, interjection), recognize and use the eight parts of speech in sentences, verb phrase Pronouns: (relative, interrogative, indefinite, relative, personal), antecedents Comma use, commas in bibliographic references, parenthetical expression, use of punctuation in direct quotations, abbreviations, dates, addresses Use a colon: (time of day, salutation in a business letter; the use of semicolons) Avoiding shifts in tense, redundancies, eliminating unnecessary words, producing effective writing Definition and use of participles, participial phrases, phrases that act as adjectives Definition and use of gerunds Principle parts of verbs: present tense, past tense, past participle, and present participle Transitive and intransitive verbs; identify the mood and voice of verbs; indicative, imperative, and subjunctive moods; active and passive voice
169
Essays & Media
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Brochure
Essay: Expository
Essay: Persuasive Essay: Scavenger Hunt Essay: Short Answer Essay: Expository Essay: Descriptive Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Paragraph Essay: Paragraph Essay: Descriptive Essay: Short Answer Essay: Short Answer
English Skills X Grade Level 10 Lesson Title 34 35 36 37 38
Vocab - Final Consonant Blends Vocab - Initial 3Letter Blends Vocab - Letters and Pronunciation Vocab - Silent Letters Vocab - Vowel Sounds Review
Lesson Content Vocabulary Skills Review of ending blends /ct/, /st/, /sk/, /rm/, and /rn/ Examples of words having /scr/, /spr/, /spl/, /squ/, /sch/, and /thr/ blends, students complete words with the correct blends Identify initial, medial, and final single consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, blends and digraphs, troublesome consonant sounds, clusters, diacritical marks Introduction of words that use silent letters /gh/, /sc/, /rh/, and /dge/, students complete words with the correct sounds Use of vowel consonant vowel clusters to create long /a/, /e/, /i/, and /u/ vowel sounds, silent letter, students identify long /a/, /e/, /i/, and /u/ words
170
Essays & Media Essay: Short Answer Essay: Short Answer Essay: Activity
Essay: Short Answer
English Skills XI Grade Level 11 Lesson Title
1
Reading - American Literature 1
2
Reading - American Literature 2
3
Reading - Cause and Effect
4
Reading Characterization
5
Reading - Classifying Information
6 7 8 9
Reading - Context Clues and Reading Reading - Farce and Satire Reading - Foreign Terms Reading Homophones & Homographs
10
Reading - Language Arts Terms 1
11
Reading - Language Arts Terms 2
Lesson Content Reading Skills Periods of American Literature: Exploration Period and Colonial Period to 1763, Revolutionary Period - 1763 to 1787, National Period - 1787 to 1820, Romantic Period - 1820 to 1860 Periods of American Literature: Realism Period - 1860 to 1914, Modernism Period 1914 to the end of World War II in 1945, Post-Modernism Period - 1945 to the present Writing strategies: (narration, description, step by step instruction), comparison and contrast, cause and effect, students identify various causes and effects by reading clues, analyzing historical events, tips for writing cause and effect analyses, linking words and phrases Make an inference based on character traits using description and dialogue, examples of how authors use characterization Definition of classifying information, students classify various groups of items, newspapers, library, yellow pages, Dewey Decimal System, atlases, encyclopedias, almanacs Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words using definition restatement, comparison, contrast, cause and effect, using synonyms as context clues Identify the elements of farce and satire; identify and correctly use oxymorons, parody, types of irony, and foil
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive Essay: Short Answer Essay: Paragraph Essay: Research Plan Writing Essay: Short Answer Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive
Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies
Essay: Short Report
Definition and examples of homophones and homographs
Essay: Short Answer
Antonym, apostrophe, aside, chorus, comedy, dialect, diction, euphemism, farce, folklore, homograph, homonym, homophone, Horation satire, idiom, Jouvenalian satire, melodrama, moral, onomatopoeia, oxymoron, parody, proverb, saga, synonym, syntax, treatise Assonance, consonance, dramatic poetry, elegy, end-stopped line, enjambment, epinikion, epistle, fixed poetry, free verse, haiku, heroic couplet, iambic pentameter, iambic poetry, in media res, kenning, limerick, lyric poetry, melic poetry, narrative poetry, ode, parallelism, rhyme types: (end, true, slant, eye, internal rhyme)
171
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
English Skills XI Grade Level 11
12 13
Lesson Title Reading - Latin and Greek Roots 1 Reading - Latin and Greek Roots 2
14
Reading - Mood and Tone
15
Reading - Poetry
16
Reading - Point of View
17
Reading - Prefixes
18
Reading - Suffixes
19
Reading - Thesaurus
20
Reading - Universal Themes in Literature
21
Usage - Adjectives
Lesson Content Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots Identify elements of mood and tone, flashback, foreshadowing, imagery; creating the mood in writing, how to identify the mood and tone in a reading selection Stanzas: (couplet: two line stanza; tercet: three line stanza; quatrain: four line stanza; cinquain: five line stanza; sestet: six line stanza; heptastich: seven line stanza; octave: eight line stanza), theme, setting, imagery, figurative language, figures of speech: (hyperbole, metaphor, personification, simile, symbol), rhyme types: (masculine, feminine, end, true, slant, eye, internal), rhyme scheme, alliteration, consonance, assonance, parallelism, onomatopoeia, kenning, free verse, caesura Recognize first-person and third-person points of view, narrator, omniscient point of view, limited point of view Using prefixes from the Greek, French, and Latin languages to determine word meaning, suffixes, and roots, using a dictionary to determine word origin (etymology) Using suffixes from the Greek, French, and Latin languages to determine word meaning, prefixes, and roots, suffixes that create nouns and adjectives, How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find words with similar meanings (synonyms) Definition and examples of conflicts: (man versus man, man versus nature, man versus self), elements of a plot: (exposition, inciting incident, central conflict, climax, resolution, rising action, falling action) universal themes of literature: (individual and self, individual and individual, individual and family, individual and society, individual and nature, individual and the universe, individual as a hero) Usage Skills Predicate adjectives, suffix endings of adjectives, adjectives as modifiers, identify and use the positive, comparative and superlative forms of adjectives, identifying adjectives in relationship to nouns and verbs, irregular forms of adjectives
172
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Short Answer Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Short Answer Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Expository
Essay: Narrative Essay: Short Answer Essay: Paragraph Essay: Descriptive
Study: CV Videos Essay: Expository
Essay: Descriptive
English Skills XI Grade Level 11
22
Lesson Title Usage Capitalization
23
Usage - Clauses
24
Usage - Infinitives
25
Usage - Nouns
26
Usage - Parts of a Sentence
27
Usage - Parts of Speech
28
Usage - Punctuation 1
29
Usage - Punctuation 2
30
Usage - Usage Problems
31
Usage - Verbs Tenses
32 33 34
Vocab - Consonants Vocab - Digraphs Vocab - R-Controlled Sounds
Lesson Content Review of common capitalization rules
Essays & Media Essay: Letter Writing
Independent and subordinate clauses, definition and use of noun, adverb, and adjective clauses, diagramming adjective and noun clauses, finding clauses in compound-complex sentences, predicate nominative, relative pronouns, coordinating conjunctions Definition and use of infinitives, infinitive phrase, use of infinitives and infinitive phrases as direct objects, predicate nominative Classification of nouns: (common or proper, concrete or abstract, compound and collective), identifying the determiner of a noun, singular and plural nouns, suffix endings, plural forms of words with Greek and Latin origins Identify subject complements, direct and indirect objects, and objective complements Review of the eight parts of speech: (noun, verb, pronoun, adjective, conjunction, adverb, preposition, interjection), how to recognize and use the eight parts of speech in sentences Use of punctuation in quotations, when to use a comma, period, colon, semicolon, question mark, exclamation point, use of quotation marks to enclose titles of short stories, essays, short poems, songs, magazine articles, parts of a book, single television programs, slang expressions, nicknames, Identify when to punctuate using apostrophes, the use of an apostrophe to show possession or the plural forms of words, possessive case of personal pronouns, indefinite pronouns Correct usage of confusing words such as a/an, good/well, discover/invent, bust/busted, could/have, accept/except, between/among, bring/take, affect/effect/ beside/besides, anywhere/everywhere, don't/doesn't, fewer/less, nowhere/somewhere Conjugation of regular and irregular verbs, present, past and past participle forms of verbs, helping verbs, transitive and intransitive verbs Vocabulary Skills Students place consonants at the beginning or end of words Review of digraphs, students complete words using /sh/, /ch/, /wh/, and /th/ Review of /er/ and /or/ sounds, students complete words using correct /ar/, /er/, /ir/, /ur/ and /or/ spelling
173
Essay: Paragraph Essay: Short Answer Essay: Short Answer Essay: Narrative Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Narrative Essay: Descriptive Essay: Short Answer Essay: Short Answer Essay: Short Answer
English Skills XI Grade Level 11
35 36
Lesson Title Vocab - SyllablesPronunciation Vocab - The Sounds of /oo/
Lesson Content The identification and use of closed, open and accented syllables, using a pronunciation key Review of sounds made by /oo/, students identify /oo/ sounds in words
174
Essays & Media Essay: Paragraph Essay: Paragraph
English Skills XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
1
Reading - British Literature 1
2
Reading - British Literature 2
3 4
Reading - Compare & Contrast Reading Connotation & Denotation
5
Reading - Drama
6
Reading - Etymology
7 8 9 10 11
12
Reading - Foreign Phrases 1 Reading - Foreign Phrases 2 Reading - Foreign Phrases 3 Reading - Foreign Terms 1 Reading - Foreign Terms 2
Reading - Genres and Literary Periods
Lesson Content Reading Skills Periods of English Literature: Classical Period - 1200 B.C. to 455 A.D.; Medieval Period - 455 A.D. to 1485; Renaissance and the Commonwealth Period - 1485 to 1660 Periods of English Literature: Neoclassical Period - 1660 to 1790; Romantic Period - 1790 to 1830; Victorian Period - 1832 to 1901; Edwardian Era - 19011910; Modernism - 1914 to 1945; Post-Modernism Period - 1945 to the present Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events, characters, etc.; similarities and differences Recognize the denotation and connotation of a word in a sentence Elements and types of drama: tragedy, melodrama, comedy, modern drama History of words derived from names and places
Essays & Media Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Essay: Compare and Contrast Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Short Answer
Understanding examples of foreign phrases
Essay: Short Answer
Understanding examples of foreign phrases
Essay: Persuasive
Understanding examples of foreign phrases
Essay: Expository
Examples of common foreign terms used in the English language Examples of common foreign terms used in the English language Almanac, anecdote, anthology, antithesis, aphorism, carpe diem, character types (round, flat, static, dynamic), conceit, connotation, convention, denotation, Electra complex, epigram, epigraph, epilogue, epitaph, epithet, foil, hamartia, metonymy, mock epic, narration, Oedipus complex, order: (spatial order, chronological order, order of importance, and logical order), oxymoron, pastoral, prologue, prose, pseudonym, pun, sarcasm, stream-of-consciousness, subplot, synecdoche, tragic flaw, universal themes of literature
175
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Letter Writing Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Short Report
Study: EB Learning Material
English Skills XII Grade Level 12 Lesson Title
13
Reading - Language Arts Terms
14
Reading - Literary Devices
15 16 17 18 19
Reading - Metaphors and Similes Reading - Outcomes and Conclusions Reading - Poetry Reading - Prefixes and Suffixes Reading Propaganda and Bias
20
Reading - Prose
21
Usage - Adverbs Usage - Clauses Review Usage Diagramming Phrases Usage Diagramming Sentences
22 23 24 25
Usage - Nouns
Lesson Content Genre, Latin literature, Age of Reason, Classical literature, contemporary literature, diary, didactic literature, dystopian literature, Enlightenment, epistolary novel, Gilded Age, Gothic novel, Harlem Renaissance, Humanism, journal, novels of local color, memoirs, Middle Ages, Modernism, Naturalism, Neoclassicism, novel, novel of manners, novella, picaresque novel, Postmodernism, Realism, regional novel, Renaissance, Romanticism, sentimental novel, short story, Transcendentalism, and the Victorian Age of literature Literary devices: alliteration, assonance, onomatopoeia, figurative language, personification, hyperbole, parallelism, antitheses, apostrophe, epithet, metonymy, synecdoche Definition of metaphor and simile; use of metaphors and similes in literature Definition of outcome and conclusion; using flashback and symbolism to predict outcomes and conclusions Elements of poetry; rhyme types; ballad; limerick; haiku; elegy; sonnet; ode; saga
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Descriptive Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive Essay: Narrative Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Persuasive
Definition and examples of commonly used prefixes and suffixes
Essay: Short Answer
Use of propaganda and bias in various forms of written works; loaded words; name calling; bandwagon; testimonials; statistics Elements of prose; types of prose: mysteries; short stories; novels; biographies; autobiographies; formal and informal essays; narrative, descriptive, expository, and persuasive essays Usage Skills Definition and use of adverbs; negative adverbs; degrees of comparison
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Poster
Review of adjective, adverb, and noun clauses
Essay: Descriptive
Review phrases; diagramming of participial phrases, gerunds, and infinitives
Essay: Short Answer
Diagramming imperative sentences and sentences with compound subjects and verbs
Essay: Short Answer
Nouns as subjects; proper and common nouns; concrete and abstract nouns; compound nouns
Essay: Short Answer
176
Study: EB Learning Material Essay: Paragraph Essay: Short Answer
English Skills XII Grade Level 12
26 27 28 29
30 31 32 33 34
Lesson Title Usage - Parts of Speech Usage - Punctuation Usage - Usage Problems Usage - Verbs Vocab - Letter Combinations Vocab - Root WordsWord Families Vocab - Two Sounds for C Vocab - Two Sounds for G Vocab - Two Sounds for S
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Review of the eight parts of speech
Essay: Short Answer
Correct usage of italics, parentheses, dash, and hyphen in sentences Correct usage of grammar including double subjects; learn/teach; leave/let; some/somewhat; than/then; a/an Identify action and state of being verbs; verb tenses (past, present, future); irregular verbs; subject-verb agreement Vocabulary Skills Review of sounds made by /au/ and /aw/; students identify /au/ and /aw/ sounds in words Root words without spelling changes; root words with spelling changes; changing the first or last letters to form word families Hard c and soft c explained; examples of words containing both sounds; students identify hard and soft c in words Hard /g/ and soft /g/ explained; examples of words containing both sounds; students identify hard and soft /g/ in words
Essay: Paragraph
Students identify words with the soft sound of s /s/ and the hard sound of s /z/
177
Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Narrative
Essay: Short Answer Essay: Narrative Essay: Short Answer Essay: Short Answer
Writing I - XII Grade Levels 1 - 12 A+LS Writing I - XII introduces students to a variety of topics including: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
learning to write a complete sentence comprehension, application, analysis, synthesis, and evaluation of writing developing ideas organizing the structure of a story structure of paragraphs, essays, short reports, letters, and short stories drafting, revision, and proofreading varieties of writing formats personal narratives journals newspaper writing descriptive writing comparing and contrasting sensory words figurative language formal and informal language composing essays writing resumes short reports research papers expressing opinions
178
Writing I - XII Grade Levels 1 - 12
The A+LS™ Writing courses are comprehensive, completely integrated courses for grades 1-12. This program directs the students through the entire writing process from learning to write a complete sentence to expressing themselves creatively through essays or other forms of writing. The A+LS Writing titles are designed to move students to the comprehension, application, analysis, synthesis, and evaluation levels of learning.
•
Writing is presented as a collection of year-long courses.
•
All lessons in the twelve courses contain an integrated study guide, and essay or constructed response.
•
Lessons include a variety of essay types such as descriptive, persuasive, expository, and letter writing.
•
A+® VIP Bundle customers receive access to Encyclopædia Britannica® Online School Edition (EB) workspaces which contain learning materials. Learning materials may contain articles, games, images, maps, and/or videos. Clearvue (CV) video clips may be included as well.
179
Writing I - XII Grade Levels 1 - 12
•
The content in these courses is designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the National Council of Teachers of English (NCTE) for the Standards of English Language Arts.
•
The Writing titles emphasize six aspects of writing, including ideas, organization, voice, word choice, fluency and conventions.
•
Students will learn varieties of writing formats that include personal narratives, journals, newspaper writing, and descriptive writing.
•
Upper grade level titles develop skills in generating ideas, composing essays, writing resumes, short reports, and research papers, and expressing opinions in preparation for standardized exit examinations and college entrance examinations.
•
Due to the interactive nature of the A+ VIP Bundle, there are a few specific software requirements: o
EB requires web browsers, the following are recommended: Microsoft Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 or higher Safari® versions 2.0 or higher Note: EB requires cookies enabled.
o
EB interactive activities require a web browser equipped with the Adobe® Flash® and Shockwave plug-ins. Available at: www.adobe.com (select Get ADOBE FLASH PLAYER and Get Shockwave Player).
180
Writing I - XII Grade Levels 1 - 12 o
•
EB video clips are offered in Windows Media® and MPEG-4 formats. You’ll need to have a media player installed that will support these formats: Quicktime® - available at: www.apple.com/quicktime/download Windows Media® Player - available at: www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/download
Numerous links to the Internet are provided in the A+ VIP Bundle. An Internet connection is not required for completion of this course, but it is required to utilize the EB components of the A+ VIP Bundle.
The A+ VIP Bundle includes the Encyclopædia Britannica Online School Edition, which has teacher resources and student learning materials. The materials include a wide range of interactive lessons, research projects, animations, and worksheets that support the Writing courses. • •
Writing contains EB workspaces. Each workspace may contain an article, diagram, study guide, video, or interactive media.
181
Writing I - XII Grade Levels 1 - 12 The Writing courses each contain a variety of lessons and differ in length, grade level, and available features. Listed below are the courses found within the curriculum planning manual.
Course Name
Number of Lessons
Grade Levels
Writing I
30
1
Writing II
34
2
Writing III
34
3
Writing IV
38
4
Writing V
45
5
Writing VI
45
6
Writing VII
45
7
Writing VIII
45
8
Writing IX
41
9
Writing X
44
10
Writing XI
46
11
Writing XII
46
12
182
Writing I Grade Level 1 1 2
Lesson Title Writing Sentences 1 Writing Sentences 2
3
Writing Sentences 3
4
Paragraphs
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Writing Writing Writing Writing Writing Writing Writing Writing
13
Writing Formats 9
14 15
Writing Formats 10 Creative Writing 1
16
Creative Writing 2
17 18 19 20 21
Story Elements Sensory Words Sketches 1 Sketches 2 Spelling and Writing
22
Personal Information
23
Ideas and Opinions Variety in Communication Sequence Writing Process 1 Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3
24 25 26 27 28
Formats Formats Formats Formats Formats Formats Formats Formats
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Lesson Content Writing complete sentences Recognizing simple and compound sentences Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, exploratory, narrative, instructive, comparative, and contrasting paragraphs Writing personal narratives Writing stories, including illustrated books Writing friendly letters Journal Writing Writing about literature Writing descriptions Writing newspaper stories Writing titles for stories and pictures Writing stories with a logical sequence including a beginning, middle, and ending Writing story details Creative activities and writing Writing poems using rhyming sounds, word patterns, onomatopoeia, and alliteration Writing from a character’s point of view Using specific words that appeal to the senses Writing a biographical sketch Writing autobiographical sketches Identifying and spelling words used frequently in writing Writing personal identification data: home address, phone number, parent’s name Writing sentences to express personal ideas and opinions
Essay & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Response Written Response Written Response Written Response Illustration
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Communicating thoughts using sentences and paragraphs Organizing written ideas into a chronological sequence Finding and narrowing a topic Pre-writing, brainstorming for ideas, using illustrations to generate ideas Writing, using strategies to produce a draft
183
Essay: Written Response
Writing I Grade Level 1 Lesson Title 29
Writing Process 4
30
Writing Process 5
Lesson Content Revising the draft, adding descriptive words, checking the appropriate use of sentence types, paragraph structure Proofreading: using a dictionary, editing for grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
184
Essay & Media
Writing II Grade Level 2
1 2 3 4
Lesson Title Writing Sentences 1 Writing Sentences 2 Writing Sentences 3 Sentence Types 1
5
Sentence Types 2
6 7 8
Writing Process 1 Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3
9
Writing Process 4
10
Writing Process 5
11
Writing Process 6
12
Paragraphs 1
13
Paragraphs 2
14
Paragraphs 3
15
Narratives
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Letters Journals Descriptions Newspaper Stories Titles Story Endings Details
23
Book Report
24 25 26
Sensory Words Biography Autobiography
Lesson Content Writing complete sentences, subject/predicate Sentence fragments Run-on sentences Recognizing simple and compound sentences Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences Finding and narrowing a topic Pre-writing: brainstorming for ideas, using illustrations to generate ideas Writing: using strategies to produce a draft Revising the draft: adding descriptive words, checking the appropriate use of sentence types, paragraph structure Proofreading: editing for grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing: using a variety of resources including pictures to produce written work Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, exploratory, narrative, and instructive Developing topic sentences, using indention when needed, using supporting details Order in paragraphs: main ideas of paragraphs, developing, and organizing paragraphs Writing personal narratives and stories with a beginning, middle and end, narrating events in sequence Writing friendly letters and addressing envelopes Using a journal to improve writing skills Writing a description of people, places, and events Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how Writing a title for stories and pictures Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels Recognizing and using details to enhance and support writing Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of the book Using specific words that appeal to the senses Writing a biographical paragraph Writing an autobiographical paragraph
185
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Illustration Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing II Grade Level 2
29
Lesson Title Expository Writing Comparison and Contrast Ideas and Opinions
30
Literary Conventions
31 32
Figurative Language Creative Writing 1
33
Creative Writing 2
34
Information
27 28
Lesson Content Writing a paragraph that explains with facts and examples or gives directions Writing a paragraph showing the similarities and differences among characters, settings, or events Writing sentences to express personal ideas and opinions Using simple literary conventions in writing: once upon a time, talking animals, enchanted forests, moral of a story Reviewing onomatopoeia and alliteration Using story starters to begin the writing process Writing poems using rhyming sounds, word patterns, onomatopoeia, and alliteration Accessing information from a variety of sources, using a table of contents, glossary, and index
186
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing III Grade Level 3
1 2 3
Lesson Title Writing Sentences 1 Writing Sentences 2 Writing Sentences 3
4
Sentence Types 1
5
Sentence Types 2
6 7 8
Writing Process 1 Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3
9
Writing Process 4
10
Writing Process 5
11
Writing Process 6
12
Paragraphs 1
13
Paragraphs 2
14
Paragraphs 3
15
Narratives
16 17
Letters Journals
18
Descriptions
19 20 21 22
Newspaper Stories Titles Story Endings Details
23
Book Reports
Lesson Content Writing complete sentences, subject/predicate Identifying the subject and predicate in complete sentences Using periods in complete sentences Recognizing simple and compound sentences, correctly using commas in sentences Defining, identifying, and writing declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences Finding and narrowing a writing topic Pre-writing: brainstorming for ideas, using illustrations to generate ideas Writing: using strategies to produce a writing draft Revising the draft: adding descriptive words, checking the appropriate use of sentence types, paragraph structure and time order Proofreading: using a dictionary, editing for grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing: using a variety of resources including pictures to produce written work Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository, narrative, instructive, comparative, and contrasting paragraphs Developing topic sentences, using indention when needed, using supporting details Order in paragraphs, main ideas of paragraphs, using time-ordered words Writing personal narratives and stories with a beginning, middle, and end, narrating events in sequence Writing friendly letters and addressing envelopes Using a journal to improve writing skills Writing a description of people, places and events, using adjectives in writing assignments Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, and how Writing a title for stories, pictures, poems, and songs Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels Recognizing and using details to enhance and support writing Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of the book
187
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing III Grade Level 3
29 30
Lesson Title Sensory Words Biography Autobiography Expository Writing Comparison and Contrast Ideas and Opinions Figurative Language
31
Literary Conventions
32
Creative Writing 1
33
Creative Writing 2
34
Information
24 25 26 27 28
Lesson Content Using specific words that appeal to the senses Identifying a topic, developing details, writing a biographical paragraph Identifying a topic, developing details, writing an autobiographical paragraph Writing a paragraph that explains with facts and examples or gives directions Writing a paragraph showing the similarities and differences among characters, settings or events Writing sentences to express personal ideas and opinions Reviewing onomatopoeia and alliteration in writing Using simple literary conventions in writing: once upon a time, talking animals, enchanted forests, moral of a story Using story starters to begin the writing process Writing poems using rhyming sounds, word patterns, onomatopoeia, and alliteration Accessing information from a variety of sources, using a table of contents, glossary, and index
188
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity
Writing IV Grade Level 4
Lesson Title 1
Writing Sentences 1
2 3 4
Writing Sentences 2 Writing Sentences 3 Sentence Types 1
5
Sentence Types 2
6 7 8
Writing Process 1 Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3
9
Writing Process 4
10
Writing Process 5
11
Writing Process 6
12
Paragraphs 1
13
Paragraphs 2
14
Paragraphs 3
15
Narratives
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Letters Journals Descriptions Newspaper Stories Titles Story Endings Details
23
Book Reports
24
Short Reports
Lesson Content Writing complete sentences, identifying and using the subject and predicate in sentences Recognizing sentence fragments and improving sentence writing skills Identifying run-on sentences Recognizing simple and compound sentences Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences Finding and narrowing a topic Pre-writing: brainstorming for ideas, using illustrations to generate ideas Writing: using strategies to produce a writing draft Revising the draft: adding descriptive words, checking the appropriate use of sentence types and paragraph structure Proofreading: using a dictionary, editing for grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing: using a variety of resources using illustrations to produce written work Definition and examples of writing paragraphs, descriptive, narrative, instructive, comparative, and contrasting paragraphs Developing topic sentences, using indention when needed, using supporting details Developing sequence and order in paragraphs, main ideas of paragraphs, organizing paragraphs Writing personal narratives and stories with a beginning, middle, and end, narrate events in sequence Writing a friendly letter Using a journal to improve writing skills Writing a description of people, places and events using observation skills Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how Writing a title for stories and pictures Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories and writing sequels Recognizing and using details to enhance and support writing Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of the book Reporting of facts and opinions to use in writing a short report
189
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Letter Writing Journal Writing Written Response Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity
Writing IV Grade Level 4
30 31 32 33
Lesson Title Sensory Words Biography Autobiography Expository Writing Comparison and Contrast Imagery Analogies Essay Ideas and Opinions
34
Literary Conventions
25 26 27 28 29
36
Figurative Language Review Creative Writing 1
37
Creative Writing 2
38
Information
35
Lesson Content Using specific words that appeal to the senses Developing an outline for writing a biography, writing a biographical paragraph Writing an autobiographical paragraph Writing a paragraph that explains with facts and examples or gives directions Writing a paragraph showing the similarities and differences among characters, settings, or events Writing a description of a vivid event using all the senses Recognizing, making, and using analogies in writing Introduction to the essay structure Writing sentences to express personal ideas and opinions Using simple literary conventions in writing: once upon a time, talking animals, enchanted forests, moral of a story
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Written Written Written
Response Response Response Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Reviewing onomatopoeia, alliteration, simile, and metaphor Using story starters to begin the writing process Writing poems using rhyming sounds, word patterns, onomatopoeia, and alliteration Accessing information from a variety of sources, using a table of contents, glossary, and index
190
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing V Grade Level 5
Lesson Title 1
Writing Process 1
2 3 4
Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3 Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
Writing Process 7
8 9 10 11 12
Writing Process 8 Writing Sentences 1 Writing Sentences 2 Writing Sentences 3 Sentence Types 1
13
Sentence Types 2
14
Journal Writing
15
Paragraphs 1
16 17 18
Paragraphs 2 Paragraphs 3 Paragraphs 4
19
Paragraphs 5
20 21 22 23 24 25
Formal-Informal Language Paragraphs 6 Paragraphs 7 Paragraphs 8 Paragraphs 9 Story Endings
Lesson Content Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing introductions and conclusions Writing introductory and concluding sentences Brainstorming, preparing a working outline Pre-writing: developing the overall focus for the writing selection Writing: using a variety of writing strategies, sequencing ideas, creating a writing draft Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization, format and sequence and create a new draft of the writing selection Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy of grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences Identifying the subject and predicate in complete sentences Identifying and correcting sentence fragments Identifying and correcting run-on sentences Recognizing simple and compound sentences Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences Using a journal to enhance writing skills Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository, narrative, persuasive paragraphs Writing topic sentences in paragraphs Developing the paragraph using supporting details and examples Identifying the concluding sentences in writing examples Recognizing the chronological sequence, place order, and order of importance in paragraphs
Essays & Media Essay: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Written Response
Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections Writing Writing Writing Writing Writing
a narrative paragraph an expository paragraph a descriptive paragraph a persuasive paragraph story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
191
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response Written Response Written Response
Writing V Grade Level 5
Lesson Title 26
Letters
27
Comparing and Contrasting
28
Library
29 30
Newspaper Stories Summarizing
31
Book Reports
32
Short Reports
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38 39 40 41
Essays Essays Essays Essays
3 4 5 6
Lesson Content Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing, addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and differences in characters, settings, and events from literature Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, and index Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, and why Summarizing written material from a variety of sources Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of the book Reporting of facts and events on a variety of topics Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual situations including reports, letters, journals, and presentations Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis, introduction, body, and conclusion Recognizing the chronological sequence, place order, and order of importance in essays Writing a narrative essay Writing an expository essay Writing a descriptive essay Writing a persuasive essay
42
Creative Writing 1
Writing a short story
43 44 45
Creative Writing 2 Creative Writing 3 Creative Writing 4
Writing various types of poetry Writing a play Writing folk literature
192
Essays & Media Essay: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: EB Learning Material Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response Written Response EB Learning Material Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing VI Grade Level 6
Lesson Title 1
Writing Process 1
2 3 4
Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3 Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
Writing Process 7
8 9 10 11 12
Writing Process 8 Writing Sentences 1 Writing Sentences 2 Writing Sentences 3 Sentence Types 1
13
Sentence Types 2
14
Journal Writing
15
Paragraphs 1
16 17 18
Paragraphs 2 Paragraphs 3 Paragraphs 4
19
Paragraphs 5
20 21 22 23 24 25
Formal-Informal Language Paragraphs 6 Paragraphs 7 Paragraphs 8 Paragraphs 9 Story Endings
Lesson Content Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing introductions and conclusions Writing introductory and concluding sentences Brainstorming: preparing a working outline Pre-writing: developing the overall focus for the writing selection Writing: using a variety of writing strategies, sequencing ideas, creating a writing draft Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization, format and sequence, and create a new draft of the writing selection Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences Writing complete sentences Identifying and correcting sentence fragments Identifying and correcting run-on sentences Recognizing simple and compound sentences Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences Using a journal to enhance writing skills Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository, narrative, persuasive paragraphs Identifying the topic sentences in writing examples Developing a paragraph using supporting details and examples Identifying the concluding sentences in writing examples Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions
Essays & Media Essay: EB Learning Material Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Journal Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections
Essay: Written Response
Writing Writing Writing Writing Writing
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
a narrative paragraph an expository paragraph a descriptive paragraph a persuasive paragraph story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
193
Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response Written Response Narrative Writing
Writing VI Grade Level 6
Lesson Title 26
Letters
27
Analogies
28
Library
29
Newspaper Stories
30
Summarizing
31
Book Reports
32
Short Reports
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38 39 40 41
Essays Essays Essays Essays
3 4 5 6
Lesson Content Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing, addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and differences in persons, places, and things Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, and index Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how Summarizing written material from various sources such as magazines, journals, and newspapers Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of the book
Essay: Written Response
Reporting of facts and events on a variety of topics
Essay: EB Learning Material Written Response
Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual situations including reports, letters, journals, and presentations Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis, introduction, body, and conclusion Extended order in essays: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions Writing a narrative essay Writing an expository essay Writing a descriptive essay Writing a persuasive essay
42
Creative Writing 1
Writing a short story
43 44 45
Creative Writing 2 Creative Writing 3 Creative Writing 4
Writing different types of poetry Writing a drama Writing folk literature
194
Essays & Media Essay: EB Learning Material Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response Written Response EB Learning Material Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing VII Grade Level 7
Lesson Title 1
Writing Process 1
2 3 4
Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3 Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
Writing Process 7
8 9 10 11 12
Writing Process 8 Writing Sentences 1 Writing Sentences 2 Writing Sentences 3 Sentence Types 1
13
Sentence Types 2
14
Journal Writing
15
Paragraphs 1
16
Paragraphs 2
17 18
Paragraphs 3 Paragraphs 4
19
Paragraphs 5
20 21 22 23 24 25
Formal-Informal Language Paragraphs 6 Paragraphs 7 Paragraphs 8 Paragraphs 9 Story Endings
Lesson Content Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing for a variety of audiences Writing introductions, thesis statements, and conclusions Brainstorming, preparing a working outline Pre-writing: developing the overall focus for the writing selection Writing a first draft using a variety of writing strategies, developing ideas, creating a writing draft Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization, format and sequence and create a new draft of the writing selection Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences Recognizing and writing complete sentences Recognizing and correcting sentence fragments Recognizing and correcting run-on sentences Recognizing simple and compound sentences, linking compound sentences Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences Using a journal to improve creative thinking and writing skills Definition and examples of writing descriptive, expository, narrative, and persuasive paragraphs Identifying the topic sentence, supporting details, and concluding sentence in writing examples Developing the paragraph using sensory, memory, and reflective details Identifying the concluding sentences in writing examples Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions
Essays & Media Essay: EB Learning Material Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Journal Writing Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections
Essay: Letter Writing
Writing Writing Writing Writing Writing
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
a narrative paragraph an expository paragraph a descriptive paragraph a persuasive paragraph story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
195
Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response Written Response Narrative Writing
Writing VII Grade Level 7
Lesson Title 26
Letters
27
Analogies
28
Library
29 30 31
Newspaper Stories Summarizing Book Reports
32
Short Reports
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38 39 40 41
Essays Essays Essays Essays
3 4 5 6
Lesson Content Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing, addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and differences in characters, settings, and events from literature Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, index, encyclopedia, atlas, almanac, and dictionary Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how Summarizing written material from a variety of sources Identifying the components and the process of writing book reports Writing a short report using various research materials Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Expressing personal ideas and opinions in writing and discussions Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis statement, introduction, body, and conclusion Recognizing and using extended chronological and spatial order and transitions in essays Writing a narrative essay Writing an expository essay Writing a descriptive essay Writing a persuasive essay
42
Creative Writing 1
Writing a short story using the required elements
43
Creative Writing 2
44
Creative Writing 3
45
Creative Writing 4
Recognizing and composing different forms of poetry Recognizing the aspects of drama by learning the components of writing and producing a play Recognizing and writing folk literature including folk tales, myths, legends, and fables
196
Essays & Media Essay: EB Learning Material Letter Writing Essay: Written Response
Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Written Response Written Response Written Response EB Learning Material Activity
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Writing Written Response Written Response Written Response EB Learning Material Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing VIII Grade Level 8
Lesson Title 1
Writing Process 1
2
Writing Process 2
3
Writing Process 3
4
Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7 8
Writing Process 7 Writing Process 8
9
Writing Sentences 1
10 11
Writing Sentences 2 Writing Sentences 3
12
Sentence Types 1
13
Sentence Types 2
14
Journal Writing
15
Paragraphs 1
16
Paragraphs 2
17
Paragraphs 3
18
Paragraphs 4
19
Paragraphs 5
20
Formal-Informal Language
Lesson Content An overview of the five-step writing process: prewriting, drafting, revising, editing, and publishing, Identifying the purpose and audience for a writing selection, selecting and narrowing a topic Learning and using different prewriting strategies including freewriting, brainstorming, preparing a working outline Writing the first draft using prewriting notes, lists, freewrites and clusters, determining a topic, purpose, and audience for a writing selection Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization, format and sequence, and create a new draft of the writing selection Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing a writing selection for a specific audience Using research skills to develop supporting details for writing selections Review: parts of a sentence, subjects, predicates, clauses, phrases, and punctuation Identifying and writing simple and compound sentences Distinguishing between complete sentences and sentence fragments Recognizing declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences and their purposes Identifying and using subordinate phrases within sentences including prepositional, participial, gerund, infinitive and appositive phrases Using a journal to enhance writing skills Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository, narrative, and persuasive paragraphs Identifying the structure of a paragraph and the topic sentences in writing examples Developing various types of paragraphs using the topic sentence and supporting details Identifying and writing the concluding sentences in paragraphs Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions Using appropriate formal and informal words and phrases in writing selections
197
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Research Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Journal Writing Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing VIII Grade Level 8
21 22 23 24 25
Lesson Title Paragraphs 6 Paragraphs 7 Paragraphs 8 Paragraphs 9 Story Endings
26
Letters
27
Analogies
28
Library
29 30
Newspaper Stories Summarizing
31
Book Reports
32
Short Reports
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38
Essays 3
39
Essays 4
40
Essays 5
41
Essays 6
Lesson Content Writing a narrative paragraph Writing an expository paragraph Writing a descriptive paragraph Writing a persuasive paragraph Writing story endings for a variety of writing examples Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing, addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes Using analogies to explain, describe or persuade by comparing a complex process to something simple and easy to understand Using library references to access information; using an encyclopedia, atlas, book index, and the Reader/s Guide Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how Summarizing written material from various sources Writing a summary of a book using different methods including the traditional book report, journal entry, friendly letter, interview, resume, character presentation, or newspaper article Reporting of facts and events from primary and secondary sources, surveys, and interviews in a short report form Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Expressing ideas and opinions in personal journals, reports, letters, and poems Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis statement, introduction, body, and conclusion Extended order in essays: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions Writing a narrative essay with a thesis statement, characters, setting, actions, a beginning, middle, and end Writing an expository essay using facts and figures, examples, analysis of a process, comparison/contrast, definition, classification, and cause and effect Writing a descriptive essay, using sensory words and figures of speech Writing a persuasive essay identifying a problem and offering a solution, using persuasion to call for action
198
Essays & Media Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: EB Learning Material Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: EB Learning Material Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing VIII Grade Level 8
Lesson Title 42
Creative Writing 1
43
Creative Writing 2
44
Creative Writing 3
45
Creative Writing 4
Lesson Content Writing a short story using the elements of setting, main character, conflict, scenes or episodes, a climax, and end Writing various types of poetry including haiku, limerick, concrete, and formula-based poems Identifying the aspects of drama by learning the components of writing and producing a play Identifying and writing various types of folk literature including folk tales, fairy tales, fables, legends, and myths
199
Essays & Media Essay: EB Learning Material Narrative Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing IX Grade Level 9
Lesson Title 1
Writing Process 1
2 3
Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3
4
Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7 8
Writing Process 7 Writing Sentences
9
Sentence Types
10
Journal Writing
11
Paragraphs 1
12
Paragraphs 2
13
Paragraphs 3
14
Paragraphs 4
15
Paragraphs 5
17 18 19 20 21
Formal/Informal Language Paragraphs 6 Paragraphs 7 Paragraphs 8 Paragraphs 9 Story Endings
22
Letters
16
Lesson Content Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing introductions and conclusions Writing introductory and concluding sentences Focusing on the purpose of writing, developing a strong topic sentence Developing the main focus of writing, sequencing, using transitional words and phrases Revising a writing draft: using different writing styles, correcting sentence structure Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences Recognizing complete sentences, avoiding fragment and run-on sentences Reviewing the basic sentence types: simple, compound, complex sentences; improving writing style and form Using a journal to enhance writing skills Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository, narrative, persuasive paragraphs Identifying the topic sentence, supporting and concluding sentences in writing samples Developing the paragraph using supporting details and examples Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions Identifying the structure in Expository Writing: cause and effect, definition, classification, and process. Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections Writing a narrative paragraph Writing an expository paragraph Writing a descriptive paragraph Writing a persuasive paragraph Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing, addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes
200
Essays & Media Essay: EB Learning Material Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response Essay: Expository Essay: Expository Essay: Activity Essay: Journal Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Expository Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Expository Descriptive Persuasive Narrative
Essay: Letter Writing
Writing IX Grade Level 9
Lesson Title 23
Analogies
24
Library
25
Newspaper Stories
26
Summarizing
27
Book Reports
28
Sketches 1
29
Sketches 2
30
Ideas and Opinions
31
Essays 1
32
Essays 2
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
Essays 3 Essays 4 Essays 5 Essays 6 Essay Tests Creative Writing Creative Writing Creative Writing Creative Writing
1 2 3 4
Lesson Content Using analogies to explain, describe or persuade by comparing a complex process to something simple and easy to understand Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, and index Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how Summarizing written material from various sources such as magazines, journals, and newspapers Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of the book Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual situations, reports, stories, letters, poetry, journals, and presentations Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis, introduction, body, and conclusion Extended order in essays: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions Writing a narrative essay Writing an expository essay Writing a descriptive essay Writing a persuasive essay Constructing and completing essay test questions Writing short stories Writing poetry Writing drama Writing folk literature
201
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Narrative Essay: Written Response Essay: Short Report Essay: Narrative Essay: Narrative Essay: Persuasive Essay: Expository Essay: Expository Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Expository Descriptive Persuasive Written Response Narrative Written Response Written Response Written Response
Writing X Grade Level 10
1
Lesson Title Journal Writing
2
Writing Process 1
3 4
Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3
5
Writing Process 4
6
Writing Process 5
7
Writing Process 6
8
Writing Sentences
9
Sentence Types
10
Paragraphs 1
11
Paragraphs 2
12
Paragraphs 3
13
Paragraphs 4
15 16 17 18
Formal-Informal Language Paragraphs 5 Paragraphs 6 Paragraphs 7 Paragraphs 8
19
Analogies
20
Correspondence
21
Resumes
22
Learning Logs
14
Lesson Content Using a journal to enhance writing skills Using writing strategies to generate ideas Identifying the audience, organizing text, preparing a working outline Writing a first draft of text using prewriting and organizing as a guide Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization, format and sequence, and create a new draft of the writing selection Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences Writing complete sentences, correcting sentence fragments and run-on sentences Recognizing simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences Review of paragraph structure: topic sentence, supporting statements, concluding sentence Developing the paragraph using supporting details and examples Identifying and creating paragraphs using cause and effect, process, and classification Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections Writing a narrative paragraph Writing an expository paragraph Writing a descriptive paragraph Writing a persuasive paragraph Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and differences in characters, settings, and events from literature Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing, addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes Creating a resume, gathering personal information, revising, and proofing the resume Developing and using a personal learning log using the strategies of questioning, evaluating, and predicting
202
Essays & Media Essay: Journal Writing Essay: EB Learning Material Expository Essay: Narrative Essay: Narrative Essay: Activity Essay: Narrative Essay: Written Response Essay: Journal Writing Essay: Journal Writing Essay: Expository Essay: Expository Essay: Expository Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Expository Descriptive Persuasive
Essay: Written Response Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing X Grade Level 10
23
Lesson Title Newspaper Stories
24
Library
25
Using Sources
26
Summarizing
27
Short Reports
28
Essay Structure
30 31 32 33
Organizing the Essay Essays 1 Essays 2 Essays 3 Essays 4
34
Research
35
Sketches 1
36
Sketches 2
37
Ideas and Opinions
38
Literary Analysis
29
39 40 41 42 43 44
Essay Tests Story Endings Creative Writing Creative Writing Creative Writing Creative Writing
1 2 3 4
Lesson Content Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, and index Locating and documenting various writing and research sources Summarizing written material from various sources such as magazines, journals, and newspapers Reporting facts and events on a variety of topics Identifying and creating structural elements in essays, including the thesis statement, introduction, body, conclusion, and transitional phrases Developing and organizing essay material addressing chronological and spatial order Writing a narrative essay Writing an expository essay Writing a descriptive essay Writing a persuasive essay Creating a research essay using documented sources Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual situations, reports, stories, letters, poetry, journals, and presentations Writing a literary analysis expressing an opinion of the quality of a book or movie Constructing and completing answers to essay test questions Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels Writing short stories Writing poetry Writing drama Writing folk literature
203
Essays & Media Essay: Narrative Writing Essay: Activity Essay: Expository Essay: Written Response Essay: Short Report Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Expository Descriptive Persuasive Research Plan Writing
Essay: Narrative Essay: Narrative Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Expository Narrative Descriptive Written Response Written Response Written Response
Writing XI Grade Level 11
Lesson Title 1
Writing Process 1
2 3 4
Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3 Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
Writing Process 7
8
Writing Sentences
9 10
Sentence Types Journal Writing
11
Paragraphs 1
12 13
Paragraphs 2 Paragraphs 3
14
Paragraphs 4
15
Paragraphs 5
17 18 19 20 21
Formal-Informal Language Paragraphs 6 Paragraphs 7 Paragraphs 8 Paragraphs 9 Story Endings
22
Correspondence
23
Writing Resumes
24
Analogies
16
Lesson Content Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing introductions, and conclusions Brainstorming, preparing a working outline Pre-writing, developing the overall focus for the writing selection Writing: using a variety of writing strategies, sequencing ideas, creating a draft Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization, format and sequence, and create a new draft of the writing selection Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences Writing complete sentences, identifying and correcting sentence fragments and run-on sentences Recognizing simple, complex, and compound sentences Using a journal to enhance writing skills Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository, narrative, persuasive paragraphs Identifying the topic sentences in writing examples Developing the paragraph using supporting details and examples Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions Methods of structure in Expository Writing: cause/effect, definitions, classification, and process Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections Writing a narrative paragraph Writing an expository paragraph Writing a descriptive paragraph Writing a persuasive paragraph Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing, addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes Preparing a resume for job, scholarship, and college applications Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and differences in characters, settings, and events from literature
204
Essays & Media Essay: EB Learning Material Persuasive Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Journal Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Expository Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Expository Descriptive Persuasive Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Compare/Contrast
Writing XI Grade Level 11
Lesson Title 25
Library
26
Newspaper Stories
27
Learning Logs
28
Summarizing
29
Sources
30 31
Literary Analysis Short Reports
32
Research Paper
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38 39 40 41 42
Essays 3 Essays 4 Essays 5 Essays 6 Essay Tests
43
Creative Writing 1
44 45
Creative Writing 2 Creative Writing 3
46
Creative Writing 4
Lesson Content Use a library to access information; use a table of contents, glossary, and index Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how Developing a learning technique that includes the strategies of questioning, evaluating, and predicting Summarizing and paraphrasing without plagiarism Discussing the process of documenting and preparing the Works Cited page for a research paper Analyzing various pieces of literature Writing short reports using information gathered from field research Identifying the fundamentals of writing a research paper Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual situations, reports, stories, letters, poetry, journals, and presentations Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis, introduction, body, and conclusion Extended order in essays: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions Writing a narrative essay Writing an expository essay Writing a descriptive essay Writing a persuasive essay Organizing information to answer essay test questions Writing a short story using the elements of plot, characterization, setting, and theme Identifying various forms of poetry, writing poetry Discussing the elements of drama, writing a scene Recognizing folklore elements, including mysteries, myths, tall-tales, legends, ballads, and fables
205
Essays & Media Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Expository Essay: Written Response Essay: Short Report Essay: Research Plan Writing Essay: Narrative Essay: Narrative Essay: Persuasive Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Expository Descriptive Persuasive Written Response
Essay: Narrative Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response
Writing XII Grade Level 12
Lesson Title 1
Writing Process 1
2 3
Writing Process 2 Writing Process 3
4
Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
Writing Process 7
8
Writing Sentences
9 10
Sentence Types Journal Writing
11
Paragraphs 1
12 13
Paragraphs 2 Paragraphs 3
14
Paragraphs 4
15
Paragraphs 5
17 18 19 20 21
Formal-Informal Language Paragraphs 6 Paragraphs 7 Paragraphs 8 Paragraphs 9 Story Endings
22
Letters
23
Resumes
16
Lesson Content Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing introductions and conclusions Brainstorming a topic, preparing a working outline Pre-writing, developing the overall focus for the writing selection Writing: using a variety of writing strategies, sequencing ideas, creating a writing draft Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization, format and sequence, and create a new draft of the writing selection Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences Writing complete sentences: identifying and correcting sentence fragments and run-on sentences Recognizing simple, compound, and complex sentences Using a journal to enhance writing skills Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository, narrative, persuasive paragraphs Identifying the topic sentences in writing examples Developing the paragraph using supporting details and examples Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions. Identifying types of structure such as comparison/contrast, problem and solution, cause and effect, definition, process, and classification Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections for different audiences Writing a narrative paragraph Writing an expository paragraph Writing a descriptive paragraph Writing a persuasive paragraph Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing, addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes Preparing a resume for job, scholarship, and college applications
206
Essays & Media Essay: EB Learning Material Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Activity Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Journal Writing Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Expository Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Expository Descriptive Persuasive Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing Essay: Written Response
Writing XII Grade Level 12
Lesson Title 24
Analogies
25
Library
26
Newspaper Stories
27
Learning Logs
28
Summarizing
29
Sources
30
Literary Analysis
31
Short Reports Writing a Research Paper
32 33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Essays 3 Essays 4 Essays 5 Essays 6 Essay Tests Creative Writing 1 Creative Writing 2 Creative Writing 3
Lesson Content Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and differences in characters, settings, and events from literature Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, and index Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how Developing a learning log that includes the strategies of questioning, evaluating, and predicting Summarizing written material from various sources such as magazines, journals, and newspapers Learning to cite information from formal and informal sources including speeches, magazines, books, and newspapers Writing a literary analysis of a piece of literature and providing an opinion on the quality of work Reporting of facts and events on a wide range of topics Writing a research paper using a variety of documented sources Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and sequencing techniques Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual situations, reports, stories, letters, poetry, journals, and presentations Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis, introduction, body, and conclusion Extended order in essays: chronological and spatial importance, transitional expressions Writing a narrative essay Writing an expository essay Writing a descriptive essay Writing a persuasive essay Constructing and completing essay test questions. Writing short stories Writing poetry Writing drama
207
Essays & Media Essay: Compare/Contrast Essay: Activity Essay: Narrative Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Short Report Essay: Research Plan Writing Essay: Narrative Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Written Response Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay: Essay:
Narrative Expository Descriptive Persuasive Written Response Narrative Written Response Written Response
Writing XII Grade Level 12
46
Lesson Title Creative Writing 4
Lesson Content Writing folk literature
208
Essays & Media Essay: Written Response
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I - VI Grade Levels 3 - 12 A+LS Language Arts Keyboard Companion I - VI introduces students to a variety of topics including: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
practice in the proper use of sentence structure sentence combination use of proper grammar in writing development of student reading, comprehension, analytic, keyboard, and problem-solving skills written (keyboard) responses to various problems modifying model paragraphs through specific instructions writing conventions proper use of nouns and pronouns subject/verb agreement verb tenses practice with proper English syntax and spoken grammar reinforcement of oral language conventions improved keyboard skills changing questions into statements movement of auxiliary verb position use of contractions plural and singular nouns compound verbs correct punctuation
209
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I Grade Levels 3-5
1 2 3 4 5 6
Lesson Title Singular-Plural Singular-Plural Singular-Plural Singular-Plural Singular-Plural Singular-Plural
7
Singular-Plural 7
8
Singular-Plural 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Nouns and Pronouns 1 Nouns and Pronouns 2 Nouns and Pronouns 3 Nouns and Pronouns 4 Nouns and Pronouns 5 Nouns and Pronouns 6 Nouns and Pronouns 7 Nouns and Pronouns 8 Nouns and Pronouns 9 Nouns and Pronouns 10 Nouns and Pronouns 11 Nouns and Pronouns 12 Nouns and Pronouns 13 Nouns and Pronouns 14 Nouns and Pronouns 15 Nouns and Pronouns 16
25
Nouns and Pronouns 17
26
Nouns and Pronouns 18
27
Nouns and Pronouns 19
28
Nouns and Pronouns 20
29
Nouns and Pronouns 21
1 2 3 4 5 6
Lesson Content Rewriting exercise changing singular nouns to plural nouns. Students rewrite paragraphs changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite paragraphs changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite paragraphs changing singular nouns to plural nouns. Students rewrite paragraphs changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite paragraphs changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite paragraphs changing plural nouns to singular nouns, changing the spelling of words. Students rewrite paragraphs changing singular nouns to plural nouns, changing the spelling of singular words Students rewrite a paragraph changing noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing third person nouns to first person nouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing the gender of the subject and matching the pronouns to gender. Students rewrite a paragraph changing the gender of the subject and matching the pronouns to gender. Students rewrite a paragraph changing first person pronouns to nouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing singular nouns to plural nouns and changing pronouns to match subject. Students rewrite a paragraph changing first person pronouns to plural nouns.
210
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I Grade Levels 3-5
30
Lesson Title Nouns and Pronouns 22
31
Nouns and Pronouns 23
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Nouns and Pronouns 24 Nouns and Pronouns 25 Nouns and Pronouns 26 Nouns and Pronouns 27 Nouns and Pronouns 28 Nouns and Pronouns 29 Nouns and Pronouns 30 Nouns and Pronouns 31 Nouns and Pronouns 32 Nouns and Pronouns 33 Nouns and Pronouns 34 Nouns and Pronouns 35 Nouns and Pronouns 36 Nouns and Pronouns 37 Nouns and Pronouns 38 Nouns and Pronouns 39 Nouns and Pronouns 40 Nouns and Pronouns 41 Nouns and Pronouns 42 Nouns and Pronouns 43 Nouns and Pronouns 44 Nouns and Pronouns 45 Nouns and Pronouns 46 Subject-Verb Agreement 1 Subject-Verb Agreement 2 Subject-Verb Agreement 3 Subject-Verb Agreement 4
55 56 57 58
Lesson Content Students rewrite a paragraph changing first person pronouns to plural nouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing third person singular pronouns to third person plural pronouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns. Students change plural nouns to singular pronouns, changing pronouns to agree with subject. Students change nouns to possessive pronouns. Students change proper nouns to possessive pronouns. Students change proper nouns to possessive pronouns. Students change possessive pronouns agree with subject. Students change first person possessive pronouns to third person possessive pronouns. Students change masculine possessive pronouns to feminine possessive pronouns. Students change proper nouns to third person possessive pronouns. Students change proper nouns to third person possessive pronouns. Students change third person masculine pronouns to third person feminine pronouns. Students change third person possessive pronouns to first person possessive pronouns. Students change proper nouns to plural possessive pronouns. Students change first person pronouns to third person pronouns. Students change third person possessive pronouns to agree with subject. Students change singular pronouns to plural pronouns. Students change third person noun to first person pronoun. Students change first person noun to agree with subject. Students change third person singular noun to third person plural pronouns. Students change third person singular nouns to third person plural pronouns.
211
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I Grade Levels 3-5
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81
Lesson Title Subject-Verb Agreement 5 Subject-Verb Agreement 6 Subject-Verb Agreement 7 Subject-Verb Agreement 8 Subject-Verb Agreement 9 Subject-Verb Agreement 10 Subject-Verb Agreement 11 Subject-Verb Agreement 12 Subject-Verb Agreement 13 Subject-Verb Agreement 14 Subject-Verb Agreement 15 Verb Tense 1 Verb Tense 2 Verb Tense 3 Verb Tense 4 Verb Tense 5 Verb Tense 6 Verb Tense 7 Verb Tense 8 Verb Tense 9 Verb Tense 10 Verb Tense 11 Verb Tense 12
Lesson Content Students change third person plural pronouns to third person singular pronouns Students change plural to singular nouns, match verbs and pronouns. Students change first person singular noun to third person singular noun. Students change third person singular nouns to first person singular pronouns. Students change plural nouns to singular pronouns. Students change third person singular nouns to first person singular pronouns. Students change third person singular nouns to third person plural nouns. Students change first person singular pronouns to third person singular pronouns. Students change first person singular pronouns to third person plural pronouns. Students change third person singular pronouns to third person plural pronouns. Students change third person singular noun to third person plural pronouns. Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students
change change change change change change change change change change change change
present to past tense, adding time referent. present to past tense, adding time referent. present to past tense, adding time referent. present to past tense, adding time referent. present to past tense, adding time referent. past to present tense, changing time referent. past to present tense, changing time referent. past to present tense, changing time referent. plural past to singular past. plural past to singular past. past perfect to present perfect, adding time referent. present to past tense, adding time referent.
212
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I Grade Levels 3-5
82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
Lesson Title Verb Tense 13 Verb Tense 14 Verb Tense 15 Verb Tense 16 Verb Tense 17 Verb Tense 18 Verb Tense 19 Verb Tense 20
Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students
change change change change change change change change
Lesson Content past to present tense, adding time referent. present to past tense, adding time referent. present to past tense, adding time referent. present to past, using plurals, adding time referent. plural present to plural past, changing spelling. present to past, adding time referent. present to past tense, adding time referent. present to past tense, adding time referent.
213
Language Arts Keyboard Companion II Grade Levels 3-5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Lesson Title Positive and Negative 1 Positive and Negative 2 Positive and Negative 3 Positive and Negative 4 Positive and Negative 5 Positive and Negative 6 Positive and Negative 7 Positive and Negative 8 Questions & Statements 1 Questions & Statements 2 Questions & Statements 3 Questions & Statements 4 Questions & Statements 5 Questions & Statements 6 Questions & Statements 7 Questions & Statements 8 Questions & Statements 9 Questions & Statements 10 Questions & Statements 11 Questions & Statements 12 Questions & Statements 13
Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students
change change change change change change change change
Lesson Content positive statements positive statements positive statements positive statements positive statements positive statements positive statements positive statements
to to to to to to to to
negative negative negative negative negative negative negative negative
statements. statements. statements. statements. statements. statements. statements. statements.
Students change statement to question, changing verb position. Students change statement to question, changing verb position. Students change statement to question, changing verb position. Students change statement to question, changing verb position. Students change statement to question, changing verb position. Students change statement to question, changing verb position. Students change statement to question, changing verb position. Students change question to statement, changing verb position. Students change question to statement changing verb position. Students change statement to question changing verb position. Students change question to statement, moving auxiliary verb. Students change statement to question changing verb position. Students change statement to question changing verb position.
214
Language Arts Keyboard Companion II Grade Levels 3-5
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Lesson Title Questions & Statements 14 Questions & Statements 15 Questions & Statements 16 Questions & Statements 17 Questions & Statements 18 Questions & Statements 19 Questions & Statements 20 Questions & Statements 21 Questions & Statements 22 Questions & Statements 23 Questions & Statements 24 Questions & Statements 25 Questions & Statements 26 Questions & Statements 27 Questions & Statements 28 Sentence Construction 1 Sentence Construction 2 Sentence Construction 3 Sentence Construction 4
Lesson Content Students change statement to question changing verb position. Students change statement to question changing verb position. Students change question to statement, moving auxiliary verb. Students change question to statement, moving auxiliary verb. Students change question to statement, moving auxiliary verb. Students change statement to question, moving verb. Students change question to statement. Students change statement to question, moving verb. Students change statement to question, moving verb. Students change question to statement. Students change statement to question. Students change statement to question. Students change statement to question. Students change question to statement, changing verb. Students change question to statement. Students Students Students Students
construct construct construct construct
correct correct correct correct
sentences sentences sentences sentences
215
from from from from
words. words. words. words.
Language Arts Keyboard Companion II Grade Levels 3-5
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
Lesson Title Sentence Construction 5 Sentence Construction 6 Sentence Construction 7 Sentence Construction 8 Sentence Construction 9 Sentence Construction 10 Sentence Construction 11 Sentence Construction 12 Sentence Construction 13 Sentence Construction 14 Sentence Combination 1 Sentence Combination 2 Sentence Combination 3 Sentence Combination 4 Sentence Combination 5 Sentence Combination 6 Sentence Combination 7 Sentence Combination 8 Sentence Combination 9 Sentence Combination 10 Sentence Combination 11 Sentence Combination 12 Sentence Combination 13 Sentence Combination 14
Students Students Students Students Students
Lesson construct correct construct correct construct correct construct correct construct correct
Content sentences sentences sentences sentences sentences
from from from from from
words. words. words. words. words.
Students construct correct sentences from words. Students construct correct sentences from words. Students construct correct sentences from words. Students construct correct sentences from words. Students construct correct sentences from words. Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students
combine combine combine combine combine combine combine combine combine
sentences, sentences, sentences, sentences, sentences, sentences, sentences, sentences, sentences,
adding adding adding adding adding adding adding adding adding
/and/ where necessary. /and/ where necessary. /but/ where necessary. /and/ or /but/ where necessary. /and/ where necessary. correct punctuation. /and/ where necessary. correct punctuation. correct punctuation.
Students combine sentences, adding correct punctuation. Students combine sentences, adding correct punctuation. Students combine sentences, adding correct punctuation. Students combine two sentences with compound subject, changing verb to agree with subject. Students combine sentences, adding correct punctuation.
216
Language Arts Keyboard Companion II Grade Levels 3-5
65
Lesson Title Sentence Combination 15
Lesson Content Students combine four sentences into two sentences, compound predicate, adding and/or.
217
Language Arts Keyboard Companion III Grade Levels 6-8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Lesson Title Singular-Plural 1 Singular-Plural 2 Singular-Plural 3 Singular-Plural 4 Singular-Plural 5 Singular-Plural 6 Singular-Plural 7 Nouns and Pronouns 1 Nouns and Pronouns 2 Nouns and Pronouns 3 Nouns and Pronouns 4 Nouns and Pronouns 5 Nouns and Pronouns 6 Nouns and Pronouns 7 Nouns and Pronouns 8 Nouns and Pronouns 9 Nouns and Pronouns 10 Nouns and Pronouns 11 Subject-Verb Agreement 1 Subject-Verb Agreement 2 Subject-Verb Agreement 3 Subject-Verb Agreement 4 Subject-Verb Agreement 5 Subject-Verb Agreement 6 Subject-Verb Agreement 7 Subject-Verb Agreement 8
Lesson Content Students change singular to plural. Students change plural nouns to singular nouns, adding articles. Students change singular nouns to plural nouns. Students change singular nouns to plural nouns. Students change indefinite amounts to specified quantities. Student change indefinite amounts to specified quantities. Students use /much/ or /many/ to change indefinite amounts to specified quantities. Students change noun phrases to pronouns. Students change masculine pronouns to feminine pronouns. Students change plural nouns to pronouns. Students change noun phrases to pronouns. Students change pronouns to agree with subject. Students change singular nouns to plural pronouns. Students change noun phrases to pronouns. Students change pronouns to agree with subject. Students change singular nouns to plural pronouns. Students change pronouns to agree with subject. Students change pronouns to agree with subject. Students change plural pronouns to singular pronouns. Students change singular nouns to plural pronouns. Students change plural nouns to singular nouns. Students change singular to plural nouns. Students change singular nouns to plural pronouns. Students change third person noun to first person pronoun. Students change third person noun to first person pronoun. Students change first person pronouns to third person noun.
218
Language Arts Keyboard Companion III Grade Levels 6-8
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Lesson Title Subject-Verb Agreement 9 Subject-Verb Agreement 10 Verb Tense 1 Verb Tense 2 Verb Tense 3 Verb Tense 4 Verb Tense 5 Verb Tense 6 Verb Tense 7 Verb Tense 8 Verb Tense 9 Verb Tense 10 Verb Tense 11
Lesson Content Students change plural to singular nouns. Students change plural to singular nouns. Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students
change change change change change change change change change change change
present to past present to past present to past present to past past to present past to present past to present present to past present to past present to past present to past
219
tense, tense, tense, tense, tense, tense, tense, tense, tense, tense, tense,
changing time and matching changing time and matching changing time and matching changing time and matching matching time and verb. matching time and verb. matching time and verb. matching time and verb. matching time and verb. matching time and verb. matching time and verb.
verbs. verbs. verbs. verbs.
Language Arts Keyboard Companion IV Grade Levels 6-8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Lesson Title Positive and Negative 1 Positive and Negative 2 Positive and Negative 3 Positive and Negative 4 Positive and Negative 5 Positive and Negative 6 Positive and Negative 7 Positive and Negative 8 Positive and Negative 9 Positive and Negative 10 Questions and Statements 1 Questions & Statements 2 Questions & Statements 3 Questions & Statements 4 Questions & Statements 5 Questions & Statements 6 Questions & Statements 7 Questions & Statements 8 Questions & Statements 9 Questions & Statements 10 Sentence Construction 1 Sentence Construction 2 Sentence Construction 3 Sentence Construction 4
Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students
change change change change change change change change change change
Lesson Content positive statement positive statement positive statement positive statement positive statement positive statement positive statement positive statement positive statement positive statement
to to to to to to to to to to
negative negative negative negative negative negative negative negative negative negative
statement. statement. statement. statement. statement, statement, statement, statement, statement, statement,
using using using using using using
Students change statement to question, moving verb. Students change statement to question, moving verb. Students change statement to question, moving verb. Students change statement to question, moving verb. Students change statement to question, moving verb. Students change question to statement, moving auxiliary verb. Students change statement to question, moving verb. Students change statement to question. Students change questions to statement. Students change questions to statement. Students create sentence from word list. Students create sentence from word list. Students create sentence from word list. Students create sentence from word list.
220
contractions. contractions. contractions. contractions. contractions. contractions.
Language Arts Keyboard Companion IV Grade Levels 6-8
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Lesson Title Sentence Construction 5 Sentence Combination 1 Sentence Combination 2 Sentence Combination 3 Sentence Combination 4 Sentence Combination 5 Sentence Combination 6 Sentence Combination 7 Sentence Combination 8 Sentence Combination 9 Sentence Combination 10 Sentence Combination 11 Sentence Combination 12 Sentence Combination 13 Sentence Combination 14 Sentence Combination 15
Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students
combine combine combine combine combine combine combine combine combine combine
Lesson Content sentences. sentences. sentences. sentences. sentences. sentences. sentences. sentences. sentences. sentences.
Students combine sentences. Students combine sentences. Students combine sentences. Students combine sentences. Students combine sentences. Students combine sentences.
221
Language Arts Keyboard Companion V Grade Levels 9-12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Lesson Title Singular-Plural 1 Singular-Plural 2 Singular-Plural 3 Singular-Plural 4 Singular-Plural 5 Singular-Plural 6 Singular-Plural 7 Singular-Plural 8 Nouns and Pronouns 1 Nouns and Pronouns 2 Nouns and Pronouns 3 Nouns and Pronouns 4 Nouns and Pronouns 5 Nouns and Pronouns 6 Nouns and Pronouns 7 Nouns and Pronouns 8 Nouns and Pronouns 9 Nouns and Pronouns 10 Nouns and Pronouns 11 Nouns and Pronouns 12 Subject-Verb Agreement 1 Subject-Verb Agreement 2 Subject-Verb Agreement 3 Subject-Verb Agreement 4 Subject-Verb Agreement 5 Subject-Verb Agreement 6 Subject-Verb Agreement 7
Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students
Lesson Content change singular nouns to plural nouns, changing change plural nouns to singular nouns, changing change singular nouns to plural nouns, changing change plural nouns to singular nouns, changing add quantities to nouns. add quantities to nouns. fill in blanks with /much/ or /many./ fill in blanks with /much/ or /many./ change noun phrases to pronouns. change nouns to pronouns. change proper nouns to pronouns. change singular to plural nouns. change nouns to pronouns. change nouns and noun phrases to pronouns. change nouns and noun phrases to pronouns. change proper nouns to pronouns. change plural to singular nouns. change proper nouns to pronouns. complete blanks using who or whom. complete blanks using who or whom.
Students change pronouns to nouns. Students change pronouns to nouns. Students change plural to singular nouns. Students change plural to singular nouns. Students change plural to singular nouns. Students change nouns to pronouns. Students change plural to singular nouns.
222
spelling. spelling. spelling. spelling.
Language Arts Keyboard Companion V Grade Levels 9-12
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Lesson Title Subject-Verb Agreement 8 Subject-Verb Agreement 9 Subject-Verb Agreement 10 Verb Tense 1 Verb Tense 1 Verb Tense 3 Verb Tense 4 Verb Tense 5 Verb Tense 6 Verb Tense 7 Verb Tense 8 Verb Tense 9 Verb Tense 10 Verb Tense 11 Verb Tense 12 Verb Tense 13 Verb Tense 14 Verb Tense 15
Lesson Content Students change plural to singular nouns. Students change singular to plural nouns. Students change singular to plural nouns. Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students
change change change change change change change change change change change change change change change
present to past tense. present to past tense. present to past tense. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of irregular verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary. tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
223
Language Arts Keyboard Companion VI Grade Levels 9-12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Lesson Title Positive and Negative 1 Positive and Negative 2 Positive and Negative 3 Questions & Statements 1 Questions & Statements 2 Questions & Statements 3 Questions & Statements 4 Questions & Statements 5 Questions & Statements 6 Sentence Construction 1 Sentence Construction 2 Sentence Construction 3 Sentence Construction 4 Sentence Construction 5 Sentence Construction 6 Sentence Construction 7 Sentence Construction 8 Sentence Combination 1 Sentence Combination 2 Sentence Combination 3 Sentence Combination 4 Sentence Combination 5 Sentence Combination 6 Sentence Combination 7 Sentence Combination 8 Sentence Combination 9 Sentence Combination 10
Lesson Content Students change positive statements to negative statements. Students change positive statements to negative statements. Students change positive statements to negative statements. Students change statements to questions, moving verb. Students change statements to questions, moving verb. Students change statement to question. Students change questions to statement. Students change questions to statement. Students change questions to statement. Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students
construct sentences from word lists. construct sentences from word lists. construct sentences from word lists. construct sentences from word lists. construct sentences from word lists. construct sentences from word lists. construct sentences from word lists. construct sentences from word lists. construct correctly punctuated paragraphs. construct correctly punctuated paragraphs. construct correctly punctuated paragraphs. construct correctly punctuated paragraphs. combine sentences using correct punctuation. combine sentences using correct punctuation. combine sentences using correct punctuation. combine sentences using correct punctuation. combine sentences using correct punctuation.
Students combine sentences using correct punctuation.
224
Language Arts Keyboard Companion VI Grade Levels 9-12
28 29 30 31 32
Lesson Title Sentence Combination 11 Sentence Combination 12 Sentence Combination 13 Sentence Combination 14 Sentence Combination 15
Lesson Content Students combine sentences using correct punctuation. Students combine sentences using correct punctuation. Students combine sentences and compound subject using correct punctuation. Students combine three sentences into two sentences, with compound predicate. Students combine three sentences into one sentence with compound verb.
Copyright © 2008 The American Education Corporation. A+, A+LS, and A+nyWhere Learning System are either trademarks or registered trademarks of The American Education Corporation. Adobe, Acrobat Reader, and Flash are registered trademarks of the Adobe Systems Incorporated. MetaMetrics and Lexile are registered trademarks of MetaMetrics, Inc. Safari and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Windows Media and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
225
View more...
Comments
